all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
User Guide Main CRVSA 02T1 75 and 90 | Users Manual | 1.38 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
User Guide Main PP2160 | Users Manual | 2.64 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
User Guide Part 1 | Users Manual | 1.43 MiB | December 08 2003 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
User Guide Part 2 | Users Manual | 2.51 MiB | December 08 2003 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
User Guide Part 3 | Users Manual | 2.31 MiB | December 08 2003 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
User Guide Part 4 | Users Manual | 2.24 MiB | December 08 2003 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
User Guide Part 5 | Users Manual | 754.97 KiB | December 08 2003 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
WLAN Guide CRVSA 02T1 75 and 90 | Users Manual | 519.58 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
WLAN Guide PP2160 | Users Manual | 526.53 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | November 06 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | November 06 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | November 06 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | November 06 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | November 06 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | November 06 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | November 06 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | November 06 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | November 06 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | External Photos | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Internal Photos | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | ID Label/Location Info | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Attestation Statements | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Attestation Statements | December 08 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | October 07 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | External Photos | October 07 2003 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Operational Description | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos |
1 2 3 4 5 6 | User Guide Main CRVSA 02T1 75 and 90 | Users Manual | 1.38 MiB |
HP Notebook PC Reference Guide Notice This manual and any examples contained herein are provided as is and are subject to change without notice. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard Co. shall not be liable for any errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual or the examples herein. Copyright Hewlett-Packard Company 2003. All rights reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation of this manual is prohibited without prior written permission of Hewlett-Packard Company, except as allowed under the copyright laws. The programs that control this product are copyrighted and all rights are reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation of those programs without prior written permission of Hewlett-Packard Co. is also prohibited. Portions of the programs that control this product may also be copyrighted by Microsoft Corporation, Phoenix Technologies, Ltd., ATI Technologies Inc., Intel Corporation, and Adobe Systems Incorporated. See the individual programs for additional copyright notices. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Microsoft, MS-DOS, and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Pentium and the Intel Inside logo are U.S. registered trademarks and Celeron and SpeedStep are U.S. trademarks of Intel Corporation. Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Reference Guide Second Edition (March 2003) Part Number: 311074-002 ii Reference Guide Important Safety Information CAUTION To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunications line cord to connect a modem to the telephone wall jack. In Australia, the computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008. When using your notebook computer with a telephone connection, always follow basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, and injury to persons:
Do not use this product with a telephone connection near water (for example, near a bathtub, sink, swimming pool, or in a wet basement). Avoid using a telephone connection (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning. Do not use a telephone connection to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this guide. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. Disconnect the modem cable before opening the computer case or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. Do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into the network (LAN) receptacle. Reference Guide iii HP Software Product License Agreement Your HP product contains software programs. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE PROCEEDING TO OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT. RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT THE CUSTOMER AGREES TO ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PROCEEDING TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT, YOU MUST NOW EITHER REMOVE THE SOFTWARE FROM YOUR HARD DRIVE AND DESTROY THE MASTER DISKETTES, OR RETURN THE COMPLETE HP PRODUCT AND SOFTWARE FOR A FULL REFUND. PROCEEDING WITH CONFIGURATION SIGNIFIES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE LICENSE TERMS. UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED BELOW, THIS HP SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL GOVERN THE USE OF ALL SOFTWARE THAT IS PROVIDED TO YOU AS PART OF THE HP PRODUCT AND SHALL SUPERSEDE ANY OTHER SOFTWARE WARRANTY STATEMENT THAT MAY BE INCLUDED IN THIS HP PRODUCT OR MAY BE FOUND ONLINE. Operating system and software applications by Microsoft are licensed to you under the Microsoft License Agreement contained in the Microsoft documentation or displayed on your screen when Microsoft Software Products are launched. For a PC supplied with a Microsoft operating system: When you start the PC and accept the Microsoft End-user License Agreement (EULA), your license rights are valid only if a Certificate of Authenticity (COA) label corresponding to your Microsoft operating system is provided with your PC. The COA label can usually be found on the bottom of the computer. If the COA label does not correspond to your Microsoft operating system or is missing, contact your HP reseller for details. Other non-HP Software and Operating Systems are covered by the appropriate vendor license. The following License Terms govern the use of the HP software:
USE. Customer may use the software on any one HP product. Customer may not network the software or otherwise use it on more than one HP product. Customer may not reverse assemble or decompile the software unless authorized by law. COPIES AND ADAPTATIONS. Customer may make copies or adaptations of the software (a) for archival purposes or (b) when copying or adaptation is an essential step in the use of the software with an HP product so long as the copies and adaptations are used in no other manner. iv Reference Guide OWNERSHIP. Customer agrees that he/she does not have any title or ownership of the software, other than ownership of the physical media. Customer acknowledges and agrees that the software is copyrighted and protected under the copyright laws. Customer acknowledges and agrees that the software may have been developed by a third party software supplier named in the copyright notices included with the software, who shall be authorized to hold the Customer responsible for any copyright infringement or violation of this Agreement. PRODUCT RECOVERY CD-ROM OR DVD. If your HP product was shipped with a product recovery CD-ROM or DVD: (i) The product recovery CD-ROM or DVD and/or support utility software may only be used for restoring the hard disk of the HP product with which the product recovery CD-ROM or DVD was originally provided.
(ii) The use of any operating system software by Microsoft contained in any such product recovery CD-ROM or DVD shall be governed by the Microsoft License Agreement. TRANSFER OF RIGHTS IN SOFTWARE. Customer may transfer rights in the software to a third party only as part of the transfer of all rights and only if Customer obtains the prior agreement of the third party to be bound by the terms of this License Agreement. Upon such a transfer, Customer agrees that his/her rights in the software are terminated and that he/she will either destroy his/her copies and adaptations or deliver them to the third party. SUBLICENSING AND DISTRIBUTION. Customer may not lease, sublicense the software, or distribute copies or adaptations of the software to the public in physical media or by telecommunication without the prior written consent of Hewlett-
Packard. TERMINATION. Hewlett-Packard may terminate this software license for failure to comply with any of these terms provided Hewlett-Packard has requested Customer to cure the failure and Customer has failed to do so within thirty (30) days of such notice. UPDATES AND UPGRADES. Customer agrees that the software does not include updates and upgrades which may be available from Hewlett-Packard under a separate support agreement. EXPORT CLAUSE. Customer agrees not to export or re-export the software or any copy or adaptation in violation of the U.S. Export Administration regulations or other applicable regulation. Reference Guide v U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure is subject to HP standard commercial license terms and for non-DOD Departments and Agencies of the U.S. Government, the restrictions set forth in FAR 52.227-19(c)(1-2)
(June 1987) Hewlett-Packard Company, 3000 Hanover Street, Palo Alto, CA 94304 U.S.A. Copyright (c) 2000 Hewlett-Packard Company. All Rights Reserved. Customer further agrees that Software is delivered and licensed as Commercial computer software as defined in DFARS 252-227-7014 (June 1995) or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101(a), or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause), whichever is applicable. The Customer agrees that it has only those rights provided for such Software by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the HP standard software agreement for the product involved. SUPPORT POLICY FOR MICROSOFT OPERATING SYSTEMS SERVICE PACK. HP will provide end user support for HP PCs that use Microsoft Operating Systems, including its latest service packs. This support will be available 30 days after the service pack being released by Microsoft. vi Reference Guide Contents Getting Started with Your Notebook .......................................................................1 Identifying Parts of the Notebook ..........................................................................2 Front panel and right panel components...........................................................2 Left panel and back panel components.............................................................4 Bottom panel components ................................................................................6 Status lights.......................................................................................................8 Setting Up Your Notebook...................................................................................10 Step 1: Insert the battery.................................................................................10 Step 2: Connect AC power .............................................................................11 Step 3: Connect a phone line ..........................................................................12 Step 4: Turn on the notebook .........................................................................13 Step 5: Set up Windows..................................................................................13 Basic Operation ........................................................................................................15 Operating Your Notebook ....................................................................................16 Default power settings ....................................................................................16 To reset the notebook......................................................................................17 To change the boot device ..............................................................................17 To use the TouchPad ......................................................................................18 To use the function hot keys...........................................................................19 To use the One-Touch buttons........................................................................20 To use the Windows and Applications keys...................................................21 To use the ALT GR key .................................................................................21 Using CDs or DVDs.............................................................................................22 To insert or remove a CD or DVD .................................................................22 To play DVD movies......................................................................................23 To create or copy CDs ....................................................................................23 Securing Your Notebook......................................................................................24 To set up password protection ........................................................................24 To lock your notebook....................................................................................24 To attach a security cable ...............................................................................25 To protect against viruses ...............................................................................25 To lock the hard drive.....................................................................................26 Reference Guide vii Taking Care of Your Notebook............................................................................27 To protect your hard drive ..............................................................................27 To maintain your notebook.............................................................................27 To safeguard your data ...................................................................................28 To extend the life of the display .....................................................................28 To clean your notebook ..................................................................................28 Batteries and Power Management..........................................................................29 Managing Power Consumption ............................................................................30 How the notebook manages power automatically..........................................30 Using Battery Power.............................................................................................32 To check battery status ...................................................................................32 To respond to a low-battery warning..............................................................33 To recharge the battery ...................................................................................33 To get the most from your batteries................................................................34 Modem and Network Connections .........................................................................35 Using the Modem .................................................................................................36 To connect the modem....................................................................................37 To change your modem settings.....................................................................38 Connecting to a Local Area Network (LAN).......................................................39 Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only).............................40 To prepare for connections .............................................................................40 To turn wireless communication on and off...................................................42 Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections (select models only) ...........................44 To turn Bluetooth communication on and off ................................................44 To prepare for Bluetooth connections ............................................................45 To send or receive files using Bluetooth ........................................................46 Add-On Devices ........................................................................................................47 Connecting PC Cards ...........................................................................................48 To insert or remove a PC Card .......................................................................48 Connecting External Devices ...............................................................................50 To connect an audio device ............................................................................50 To use an external monitor .............................................................................52 To connect an IEEE 1394 device (select models only)..................................53 To connect an infrared device (select models only).......................................54 To use a port replicator (select models only) .................................................55 Installing Additional RAM (Memory) .................................................................58 To install a RAM expansion module..............................................................58 To remove a RAM expansion module............................................................60 viii Reference Guide Replacing the Hard Drive.....................................................................................62 To replace the hard drive ................................................................................62 To replace the hard drive holder.....................................................................63 To prepare a new hard drive ...........................................................................64 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.........................................................................65 Troubleshooting Your Notebook..........................................................................66 Audio problems ..............................................................................................66 CD-ROM and DVD problems........................................................................67 Display problems ............................................................................................68 Hard drive problems .......................................................................................69 Heat problems.................................................................................................70 Infrared problems............................................................................................70 Keyboard and pointing device problems ........................................................71 Local area network (LAN) problems..............................................................72 Memory problems...........................................................................................73 Modem problems ............................................................................................73 PC Card problems...........................................................................................76 Performance problems ....................................................................................76 Power and battery problems ...........................................................................77 Printing problems............................................................................................79 Serial, parallel, and USB problems ................................................................80 Startup problems.............................................................................................81 Wireless problems ..........................................................................................82 Configuring Your Notebook ................................................................................84 To run the BIOS Setup utility.........................................................................84 To change video memory settings using BIOS Setup utility .........................87 Reinstalling and Updating Software.....................................................................88 To replace a damaged QuickRestore System Recovery CD............................88 Reference Information.............................................................................................89 Modem Reference Information ............................................................................90 Modem Reference (Conexant)........................................................................90 Safety Information................................................................................................97 Power cords ....................................................................................................97 Battery safety ..................................................................................................98 Laser safety.....................................................................................................98 LED safety ......................................................................................................99 Mercury safety ................................................................................................99 Exposure to radio frequency radiation..........................................................100 Reference Guide ix Regulatory Information ......................................................................................101 U.S.A. ..........................................................................................................101 Canada ..........................................................................................................103 European Union ............................................................................................104 Japan .............................................................................................................106 New Zealand.................................................................................................107 Russia............................................................................................................108 International..................................................................................................108 Index ........................................................................................................................111 x Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Reference Guide 1 Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Components included with the notebook vary by geographical region and features selected. The following illustrations identify the standard external components included with most notebook models. Find the illustrations that match your notebook to identify your components. Front panel and right panel components Hard drive Infrared port (select models only) 7 8 9 Wireless on-off button and indicator light
(select models only) 10 Battery 11 CD-ROM, DVD, or other drive 12 PS/2 port 1 Notebook open/close latch 2 One-Touch buttons 3 Keyboard status lights 4 Power button: turns the notebook on and off 5 TouchPad, scroll pad, Click buttons, and an on-off button 6 Main status lights (left to right): power mode, hard drive activity, and battery 2 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notebook open/close latch One-Touch buttons Keyboard status lights Power button: turns the notebook on and off TouchPad, scroll pad, Click buttons, plus on-off button Main status lights (left to right): power mode, hard drive activity, and battery Infrared port (select models only) 8 Wireless on-off button and indicator light
(select models only) Battery 9 10 Audio mute button, audio mute light, and volume control 11 Audio jacks (left to right): audio out
(headphones), external microphone 12 CD-ROM, DVD, or other drive 13 Universal serial bus port (USB) Reference Guide 3 Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Left panel and back panel components 8 Cable lock slot (security connector) 9 RJ-11 jack: connects the modem cable 10 PC Card and CardBus slot and button 11 12 Audio jacks (left to right): external microphone, IEEE 1394 port (select models only) audio out (headphones) 13 Volume control 14 Audio mute button and audio mute light 15 Diskette drive (select models only) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AC adapter jack Universal serial bus ports (USB) RJ-45 jack: connects a network cable S-Video out jack Parallel port (LPT1): use this port for a parallel printer or other parallel device Serial port (COM1): use this port for a serial mouse, modem, printer, or other serial device External monitor port 4 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook 1 2 3 4 5 AC adapter jack Two USB ports RJ-45 network jack: connects a network cable PS/2 port Parallel port (LPT1): use this port for a parallel printer or other parallel device External monitor port S-Video out jack Cable lock slot (security connector) RJ-11 jack: connects a modem cable IEEE 1394 port (select models only) 6 7 8 9 10 11 PC Card and CardBus slot and buttons 12 Diskette drive (select models only) Reference Guide 5 Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Bottom panel components 1 2 3 Hard drive Battery latch RAM (memory) cover 4 5 6 Reset button Docking port (select models only) Mini PCI cover (no user parts inside) 6 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook 1 2 3 Hard drive Battery latch Mini PCI cover (no user parts inside) 4 5 6 RAM (memory) cover Docking port (select models only) Reset button Reference Guide 7 Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Status lights The notebook includes a number of status lights that report power and battery status, drive activity, and keyboard functions such as Caps Lock and Num Lock. The following diagram shows the main status lights on the front of the notebook. 1 Power mode Onnotebook is on (even if the display is off) Blinkingnotebook is in Standby Offnotebook is off or in Hibernation 2 Hard drive activity Onnotebook is accessing the hard drive 3 Battery status GreenAC adapter is connected and the battery is fully charged AmberAC adapter is connected and the battery is charging BlinkingAC adapter is connected and the battery is missing or has a fault OffAC adapter is not connected 8 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook The keyboard status lights, located above the keyboard, indicate the states of the keyboard locks. 1 Caps Lock On. Caps Lock is active. 2 Num Lock On. Num Lock is active. (The Keypad Lock must also be on to use the embedded keypad.) 3 Keypad Lock On. The embedded keypad is active (Fn+F8). Num Lock must also be for the numeric keys. Otherwise, cursor control is active (as marked on an external keyboard). Reference Guide 9 Getting Started with Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook WARNING Improper use of keyboards and other input devices has been associated with ergonomic injury. If you are using your notebook as your primary computer, or using it for extended periods, you should use it with a full-sized keyboard, monitor, and mouse. Docking accessories offer quick, easy connections to these devices. This can reduce the risk of ergonomic injury. For information about reducing your risk, see the Safety & Comfort Guide on this CD included with your notebook. When you set up your notebook for the first time, you will charge the battery, connect the AC adapter, turn on the notebook, and run the Windows setup program. Step 1: Insert the battery WARNING Do not mutilate or puncture batteries. Do not dispose of batteries in fire, or they can burst or explode, releasing hazardous chemicals. Rechargeable batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly. Your notebook is shipped with the battery installed. If the battery has been removed, you should install it:
1. Turn the notebook upside down. 2. Insert the connector end of the battery into the battery compartment, then slide the battery in until it latches. 10 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook Step 2: Connect AC power CAUTION Use only the AC adapter included with your notebook (or other approved adapter that meets the power requirements of the notebook). Using the wrong AC adapter could damage the notebook or adapter or cause data loss and may void your warranty. 1. Plug the AC adapter into the notebook. 2. Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 3. Plug the power cord into a wall outlet. The notebook battery starts charging. Important When unplugging the power cord, unplug it from the wall outlet before unplugging it from the AC adapter. While the battery is charging, you can continue with the Step 3: Connect a phone line section. Reference Guide 11 Getting Started with Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook Step 3: Connect a phone line 1. Make sure the telephone line is an analog line, sometimes called a data line.
(Do not use a digital line.) 2. Connect the telephone cord (RJ-11) into a telephone jack. 3. Plug the other end of the telephone cord into the RJ-11 modem jack on the notebook. For details about using the modem, see Using the Modem later in this guide. 12 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook Step 4: Turn on the notebook Press the power button above the left side of the keyboard. The notebook boots up and Windows starts automatically. Hint If your notebook does not turn on when operating on battery power, the battery may be out of power. Plug in the AC adapter, then press the power button again. Leave the AC adapter plugged in for several hours to fully charge the battery. Charge times will vary. Step 5: Set up Windows Your notebook has the Microsoft Windows operating system preinstalled on its hard drive. The first time you turn on your notebook, the Windows Setup program runs automatically so you can customize your setup. 1. Follow the Setup program instructions on the screen. If the program prompts you to enter the Product ID code, locate the code on the bottom of the notebook. 2. Check the modem country or region settings. Select Start > Control Panel >
Printers and Other Hardware > Phone and Modem Options, then choose your country or region. Reference Guide 13 Basic Operation Reference Guide 15 Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook Operating Your Notebook You can start and stop your notebook using its power button. However, at certain times you may want to use other methods to start or stop the notebookdepending on power considerations, types of active connections, and startup time. Power mode ONPower status light will turn on. OFFPower status light will turn off. StandbyPower status light will blink. Default power settings To enter this mode Briefly press the power button. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If the system has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off the notebook. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Stand By. or Allow the system to time out. Hibernation Power status light will turn off. If the unit is already on, briefly press the power button. or Press Fn+F12. or Allow the system to time out. Function Powers on the notebook. Powers off the notebook. Saves significant power. Turns off the display and other components. Maintains current session in RAM. Restarts quickly. Restores network connections. Saves maximum power. Saves current session to disk, then shuts down. Restores network connections. You can also customize the way these power modes work. See the Batteries and Power Management chapter in this guide. 16 Reference Guide Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To reset the notebook Occasionally, you may find that Windows or the notebook has stopped responding and will not let you turn the notebook off. If this happens, try the following procedures in this order:
If possible, shut down Windows. Press CTRL+ALT+DEL, then select Shut Down, Restart. or Press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds until the display shuts down. Any unsaved data will be lost. Then press the power button again to restart. or Insert the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook, then press the power button to restart. To reset the notebook while it is docked in a port replicator, you can press the reset button on the left side of the port replicator. To change the boot device The notebook normally boots from its internal hard drive. You can also boot the notebook from a diskette drive, a CD-ROM drive, or an internal network interface card. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. When the logo screen appears, press ESC to display the Boot menu. 3. Use the arrow keys to select the boot device, then press ENTER. If you want to boot from a specific device whenever it is present, change the boot order using the BIOS Setup utility. See Configuring Your Notebook in the Troubleshooting and Maintenance chapter in this guide. Reference Guide 17 Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To use the TouchPad The TouchPad includes an on-off button so you can turn off the TouchPad to avoid moving the pointer accidentally, such as by touching the pad while typing. The indicator light turns off when you turn off the TouchPad. 1 Click buttons. The Click buttons work like the left and right buttons on a standard mouse. 2 TouchPad (touch-sensitive pointing device). 3 TouchPad on-off button and indicator light. 4 Scroll pad. The scroll pad scrolls vertically to display the contents of the active window. 18 Reference Guide Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To use the function hot keys The combination of the Fn key plus another key creates a hot keya shortcut key sequencefor various system controls. To use a hot key, press and hold Fn, press the appropriate second key, then release both keys. This hot key Fn+F1 Fn+F2 Fn+F8 Fn+F12 Fn+NumLock Fn+Page Up Fn+Page Down Fn+Backspace Does this Decreases the display brightness. Increases the display brightness. Toggles the built-in keypad on and off. Does not affect an external keyboard. If Num Lock is on, then the numeric functions are active. Otherwise, cursor control is active (as marked on an external keyboard). Enters Hibernation. Toggles Scroll Lock on and off. Increases the audio volume and cancels the mute setting. Decreases the audio volume. Mutes/unmutes the audio output. Reference Guide 19 Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To use the One-Touch buttons Your notebook includes five One-Touch buttons that can start any application or open a document or Web site with a single press. Press a One-Touch button to open the corresponding application, document, or Web site. To program a One-Touch button 1. Select Start > All Programs > Utilities > One Touch. 2. On the One-Touch tab, select the button you want to reprogram. 3. Type a label for the button, then select the application, document, folder, or Web site you want the button to open. 4. If you want a label to appear onscreen when you press a One-Touch button, select that option on the Onscreen Display tab. 20 Reference Guide Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook To use the Windows and Applications keys The Windows key brings up the Windows Start menu. This is the same as selecting the Start button on the taskbar. The Applications key brings up the shortcut menu for the selected item. This is the same menu that appears when you right-click while pointing at the selected item. This key combination Windows key+E Windows key+F1 Windows key+F Windows key+M Shift+Windows key+M Windows key+R Does this Runs Windows Explorer Runs Windows Help Runs Windows Find: Search Minimizes all displayed windows Returns all minimized windows to original size Runs the Windows Run dialog box To use the ALT GR key Non-U.S. keyboards have an ALT GR key to the right of the spacebar. This is a shift key that provides access to certain special keyboard characters. For a character in the lower-left corner of a key, press and hold ALT GR to type the character. 1 Shifted 2 Unshifted 3 ALT GR Reference Guide 21 Basic Operation Using CDs or DVDs Using CDs or DVDs To insert or remove a CD or DVD CAUTION Do not remove a CD or DVD while the notebook is reading it. Otherwise, the notebook could stop responding and you could lose data. Press the CD or DVD gently, but firmly, onto the spindle to avoid damage to the disk or drive. 1. Press the button on the face of the CD or DVD drive. If you are using this drive for the first time, be sure to remove the cardboard packing insert if present. 2. Place the CD or DVD into the drive (label facing up), then gently press down to seat it on the spindle. or Remove the CD or DVD. 3. Slide the tray back into the module to close it. If your notebook loses power, you can manually open the drive to remove a CD. Insert a straightened paper clip into the recessed hole on the front of the drive to open it. The location of the CD or DVD drive varies by model. 22 Reference Guide Hint Important Basic Operation Using CDs or DVDs To play DVD movies If your notebook is equipped with a DVD or other DVD readable drive, it also includes a DVD player software that lets you play DVD movies. Select Start > All Programs > Multimedia > DVD Player > InterVideo WinDVD. For best performance while playing movies on battery power, set the Control Panel power scheme to Portable/Laptop. DVDs can have regional codes embedded in the disc data. These codes prevent DVD movies from being played outside the region of the world in which they are sold. If you get a region code error, you are trying to play a DVD intended for a different region. Most DVD drives let you change the region code only a limited number of times
(usually no more than four). When you reach this limit, your last change to the region code will be hard-coded on the DVD drive, and will be permanent. Your warranty does not cover the expense of correcting this situation. Refer to the Help for your DVD player software for details about setting region codes. To create or copy CDs If your notebook is equipped with a DVD/CD-RW combo drive, it also includes software such as Roxio Easy CD Creator that lets you copy or create CDs. Follow the instructions that are included with the software. Read and write quality may vary by media. Reference Guide 23 Basic Operation Securing Your Notebook Securing Your Notebook To set up password protection You can protect your notebook from access by another user when you set up password protection, which is available through Windows and through the BIOS Setup utility. See Configuring Your Notebook in the Troubleshooting and Maintenance chapter. For complete protection, set passwords in Windows as well as through BIOS Setup. To cancel password protection, set an empty password. Windows 1. Select Start > Control Panel > User Accounts, then select your account. 2. Select Create a Password, then set the password. 3. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. 4. On the Advanced tab, select the option to prompt for a password when the notebook leaves Standby. To lock your notebook To protect against unauthorized access while your notebook is running, lock the notebook before leaving it unattended, or set up a screen saver with a Windows password. You can lock the notebook these ways:
If a One-Touch button is assigned to Quick Lock, press that button. or Press CTRL+ALT+DEL, then select Lock Computer. To unlock the notebook, follow your normal logon steps. 24 Reference Guide Basic Operation Securing Your Notebook To attach a security cable Your notebook includes a built-in connector to secure the notebook with a cable and a lock (such as the Kensington MicroSaver lock system, available at many computer stores). 1 Wrap the cable around a secure object, such as a table leg. 2 3 Insert the cable into the security cable slot on the notebook. Lock it with the cable lock key, then store the key in a safe place away from the notebook. To protect against viruses Virus-protection software can help protect the integrity of your data. This is especially important if you use the Web. Your notebook comes equipped with the Norton AntiVirus software. You can get detailed instructions from the Norton online Help. Because new viruses appear frequently, you will also want to update the program virus definitions periodically. Norton AntiVirus updates are on the Web at www.symantec.com. Reference Guide 25 Basic Operation Securing Your Notebook To lock the hard drive The notebook enables you to lock its internal hard drive to help keep your information secure. Hard drive lock does not protect a second hard drive installed in the module bay. CAUTION When you enable hard drive lock, the current BIOS user password (or administrator password if that is the only password set) is encoded on the hard drive. If you move the hard drive to another computer, you cant access the drive until you set the user (or administrator) password to match the drive password. After you match the drive password, you can change the computer (and drive) password. If you forget the password, you cannot recover your data. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. When the logo screen appears, press F2 to enter the BIOS Setup utility. 3. From the Security menu, enable Password Required to Boot. 4. From the Security menu, enable Internal hard drive lock. 5. Press F10 to save and exit BIOS Setup. 26 Reference Guide Taking Care of Your Notebook Basic Operation Taking Care of Your Notebook Use the following recommendations to maintain your notebook during everyday use and prevent potential physical damage or data loss. To protect your hard drive Hard drives, as well as other internal components, are not indestructible and can be damaged by inappropriate handling and operation. Avoid bumps or jolts. Do not operate the notebook while traveling over bumpy terrain. Put the notebook in standby or shut it down before transporting it. This turns off the hard drive. A drop of a few inches onto a rigid surface while the hard drive is operating could destroy data or damage the drive. Carry the notebook in a padded case to protect against bumps and jolts. Set down the notebook gently. To maintain your notebook Provide adequate ventilation around the notebook. Always set the notebook on a flat surface, so that air can flow freely around and underneath it. Always shut down the notebook or put it in Hibernation before putting it in a carrying case or other enclosed space. Do not pick up or carry the notebook by its display. Do not use the notebook outside in the rain or snow (inclement weather). If the notebook is cold, warm it gradually to avoid condensation. Maintain your battery for best performance. See the Batteries and Power Management chapter. Reference Guide 27 Basic Operation Taking Care of Your Notebook To safeguard your data Do not use a pointing device or activate any other device that interrupts operation while the system is starting or stopping. Back up your work regularly. Copy files to diskettes, CDs, DVDs, and other media or network drives. Use a virus-scanning program (such as the Norton AntiVirus program included with your notebook) to check the integrity of your files and operating system. Check your disk using the Tools tab in the disk Properties window. To extend the life of the display Set the display brightness to the lowest comfortable level (Fn+F1). When working at your desk, connect an external monitor and turn off the internal display (press the TV Now! One-Touch button at the top of the keyboard). If you are not using an external monitor, set the Turn off monitor timeouts (for both AC and battery operation) to the shortest comfortable interval. Avoid using a screen saver or other software that prevents the notebook from changing to Display-off or Standby after a timeout period. If you use a screen saver, enable the option to shut off the display after a time delay. Do not disable Display-off or Standby timeouts. If you are using AC power and have no external monitor attached, put the notebook in Standby when not in use. To clean your notebook You can clean the notebook with a soft cloth dampened with clean water or with water containing a mild detergent. Do not use an excessively wet cloth, and take care to keep water out of the case. Do not use abrasive cleaners, especially on the display. Do not apply any cleaner directly to the display. Instead, apply the cleaner to a soft cloth, then gently wipe the display. 28 Reference Guide Batteries and Power Management Reference Guide 29 Batteries and Power Management Managing Power Consumption Managing Power Consumption When you are running your notebook on battery power, you can maximize operating time without compromising performance. Your notebook is designed to help you reduce power consumption and extend battery life. During idle periods, the notebook automatically enters power-saving modes after specified timeout periods. You can adjust these timeouts to suit your working habits. How the notebook manages power automatically Your notebook enters Hibernation and Standby automatically, and turns off the hard drive and display based on values set in Windows. When this occurs No keyboard, pointing device, or other input activity occurs for the specified interval The hard drive is not accessed for a specified interval No pointing devices are used, no disk drive is accessed, and no port (serial, parallel, or infrared) is active for the specified interval The notebook stays in Standby for the specified interval The result is Display turns off. Turns off the display to conserve battery power and extend the life of the display. Hard drive turns off. This is usually set to occur shortly after the display is turned off. Standby is initiated. Maintains your current session in RAM, and turns off the display and other components to conserve battery power. Hibernation is initiated. Saves your current session to the hard drive, and turns off the notebook. To resume Briefly press any key or move a pointing device to turn on the display. Begin using the notebook, and the hard drive turns on. Briefly press the power button to return to your current session. Press the power button to return to your previous session. CAUTION Make a habit of saving your work before allowing your notebook to enter Standby. If power is interrupted while the notebook is in Standby, any information that was not saved will be lost. 30 Reference Guide Batteries and Power Management Managing Power Consumption The notebook can also enter Hibernation if battery power reaches a critically low level. If this happens, you will find on resuming that all your data has been saved, but some functions may be disabled. To resume normal operation, restore power by connecting an AC adapter or installing a charged battery, then shut the notebook off and restart it. Changing timeout settings and creating power schemes You can adjust the length of timeouts after which your notebook automatically shuts down components or enters a power-saving mode. You can also save these settings as a power scheme. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Select the Power Schemes tab, then enter the settings you want. If you do not want a particular timeout to occur, set the value to Never. See Windows Help for details. If you want to save the settings as a power scheme, select Save As and enter a name for the scheme. CAUTION Do not disable Hibernate support in the Power Options settings, or you will lose any unsaved data if the notebook battery runs down completely. Reference Guide 31 Batteries and Power Management Using Battery Power Using Battery Power To check battery status From the battery status light Check your notebook battery status light. From the Windows taskbar The Windows taskbar can display a power icon that provides detailed battery status information (see Windows Help for details). The icon resembles a battery when AC power is not connected. Place the pointer over the power icon to display the remaining battery charge. This value is shown as either a percentage of charge remaining, or as time remaining. Select the power icon to open the Battery Meter window. From the Windows Control Panel Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options, then select the Power Meter tab to see the battery status. The Alarms and Advanced tabs provide additional Windows power-information options. On the battery 1. Remove the battery from the notebook. See the Getting Started with Your Notebook chapter in this guide. 2. Press the contact pad on the side of the battery. The number of lights that turn on indicates the remaining charge (each light represents 20 percent of a full charge). 32 Reference Guide Batteries and Power Management Using Battery Power To respond to a low-battery warning The notebook automatically alerts you when the battery power drops to a critically low level. The notebook first emits a high-pitched beep or displays a warning message. Then, if you do not restore power within a short time, the notebook enters Hibernation. After the notebook enters Hibernation in this way, you will not be able to turn it on again until you restore power by doing one of the following procedures:
Replace the battery with a charged one. Plug in the AC adapter. Note If you plug in the AC adapter, you can continue to work while your battery recharges. To recharge the battery CAUTION The AC adapter is normally warm whenever plugged into an AC outlet. The notebook is normally warm while recharging. Do not recharge the notebook in a briefcase or other confined space, or the battery could overheat. Plug the AC adapter into the notebook. To get the longest operating time, wait until the battery charge is below 50 percent before recharging, then charge it fully (100 percent). Charging can take up to several hours. If you continue working while the battery charges, the charging time may increase. The operating time for a fully charged battery depends on the notebook model, power management settings, and level of use. Reference Guide 33 Batteries and Power Management Using Battery Power To get the most from your batteries Follow these suggestions to make your battery power last as long as possible:
Plug in the AC adapter, especially when using a CD-ROM or DVD drive, or any external connections such as a PC Card or a modem. Set the display brightness to the lowest comfortable level (Fn+F1). Put the notebook in Standby whenever you are not using it for a short while. Put the notebook in Hibernation whenever you want to save your current session, but will not be using the notebook for a day or more. Set the automatic timeout settings to emphasize saving power. If your notebook has a multispeed processor, use the lower speed on battery power (the default settings conserve battery power). If your notebook has a wireless on-off button, turn off the wireless function when you are not using it. Press the wireless on-off button so that the light turns off. If you have a PC Card such as a network card, remove it when you are not using it. Some PC Cards use significant power even while they are inactive. If you work with an application that uses the serial port or a PC Card, exit the application when you finish using it. Do not leave batteries unused for long periods. If you have more than one, rotate them. If you normally use AC power, make a practice of using the battery as your power source at least once a week. Unplug the AC adapter when the notebook is not in use. To preserve the life of a battery, be sure to charge it regularly. For long-term storage, the battery must be charged 20 percent to 50 percent to minimize capacity loss by self-discharge and to avoid deterioration of battery performance. Avoid using or charging batteries at high temperatures. 34 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Reference Guide 35 Modem and Network Connections Using the Modem Using the Modem Internet Explorer, for browsing the World Wide Web You can connect your modem to a telephone line and communicate with other computers throughout the world. You can explore the Internet, send and receive e-mail messages, and use your notebook to send and receive faxes. Your notebook contains several software programs that work with your modem:
Outlook Express, for sending and receiving e-mail messages Windows Fax Console software for sending and receiving faxes For best performance, you can connect to any Internet Service Provider (ISP) or modem network that has V.90 or V.92 interoperable modems. Check with your ISP for a list of telephone numbers that support V.90 or V.92. (V.92 enables modem on-hold technology that allows an Internet session to be interrupted to answer a phone call, then resumes the Internet session once the call is complete.) The maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 Kbps, even though the modem is capable of downloading at higher speeds. 36 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Using the Modem To connect the modem CAUTION Your built-in modem may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX), cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and does not work with party lines. Some of these connections may result in excess electrical voltage and could cause a malfunction in the internal modem. Check your telephone line type prior to connecting your phone line. Special restrictions in certain countries Many countries impose a blackout period after a modem repeatedly fails to connect to a service provider. The number of failed attempts and the period you must wait before trying again differ from country to country. Check with your telephone company. For example, if you are dialing from Italy and fail to connect to your server or cancel the connection, you must wait one minute before dialing that number again. If you dial before then, you will get an error message that says delay. After the fourth failed connection, you must wait one hour before trying the number again. If you dial before the hour is up, you will get a message that says black list. When using a modem, an external surge protector can prevent damage to your notebook from lightning or other electrical surges. Connect any approved surge protector to the modem cable when you are using the modem. Reference Guide 37 Modem and Network Connections Using the Modem To change your modem settings The modem is already set up to be compatible with telephone systems and modems in most areas. However, in some situations, you may have to change modem settings to match local conditions. If you have questions about local requirements, contact your telephone company. Control Panel. Open Phone and Modem Options in Control Panel to change many modem settings. On the Modems tab, select Properties to set connection speeds, or on the Dialing Rules tab select Edit to set dialing options. Communications software. Many communications applications provide options for controlling modem settings. See the Help for your software. AT commands. You can control many aspects of modem operation using modem AT commands. AT commands are special strings of characters sent to the modem to set up specific conditions. Those command strings normally start with AT. For a list of AT commands for the built-in modem, see the Reference Information chapter. Open Phone and Modem Options in Control Panel. On the Modems tab, select Properties. You can type AT commands on the Advanced tab in the space for extra settings. 38 Reference Guide Connecting to a Local Area Network (LAN) Modem and Network Connections Connecting to a Local Area Network (LAN) LANs give you access to network resources, such as printers and file servers on your corporate network, and possibly to the Internet. To connect to a LAN:
1. Check that the existing LAN supports Ethernet 10Base-T (10 Mbps) or 100Base-TX (100 Mbps) connections. 2. Plug the LAN cable (not supplied) into the built-in LAN port. The cable must have an RJ-45 connector. 3. Windows automatically detects and sets up a LAN connection. To edit settings, open Network and Dial-up Connections in Control Panel. See Windows Help for information about setting up and using LAN connections. Select Start > Help and Support. Contact your network administrator for network information. Two lights next to the LAN port indicate the status of the connection:
The yellow light indicates network activity. The green light indicates a 100 Mbps link. Reference Guide 39 Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) If your notebook includes a wireless on-off button, you can connect by radio to an 802.11 wireless local area network (LAN) and access computers and other resources on the network. A wireless network provides all the functions of a typical wired network, but also provides for roaming. Since your notebook connects to the network by radio rather than through cables, you can move from place to place within the networkfrom your office to a conference room, for exampleand remain on the network the entire time. To prepare for connections Before you can connect your notebook to a particular 802.11 wireless network, you have to configure the notebook for the specific wireless connection. Connecting to an existing wireless network You can connect to an access point that gives you access to a local area network, or you can connect directly to other computers in an ad hoc network. 1. Right-click the wireless network connection icon in the taskbar, then select View Available Wireless Networks from the pop-up menu. 40 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) 2. A list of available networks appears. Select the network you want, enter the encryption key if required, then select Connect. If the network you want is not on the list, select Advanced > Configure, and enter the required network parameters. If the network is not using 802.1x authentication protocol, clear the automatic key option. 3. On the General tab, edit network settings as needed for your local network. See your network administrator. You can also display an icon in the taskbar when connected to a network. 4. On the Wireless Networks tab, view the wireless networks available within range. Each network SSID is listed. Select the network you want, then select Configure. 5. If the wireless network uses standard encrypted communication, uncheck the automatic key option, then select the following parameters:
Key: ASCII passphrase or hexadecimal key string. Key format: ASCII for passphrase, hexadecimal for key string. Key length: smaller number for 64-bit encryption, larger number for 128-bit. See your network administrator for the required settings. 6. Select OK to save the configuration. This network is added to your list of preferred networks. The notebook automatically connects to the first preferred network within range if wireless communication is turned on. Creating a New Computer-to-Computer Network (Ad Hoc) You can set up a new network available to other local computers. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Network Connections. 2. Select the wireless connection to show its status, then select Properties. 3. On the Wireless Networks tab, select Add to create a new network. 4. Type a name for the new network. Reference Guide 41 Important Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) 5. If you want to use encrypted communication, uncheck the automatic key option, then select the following parameters:
Key: ASCII passphrase or hexadecimal key string Key format: ASCII for passphrase, hexadecimal for key string Key length: smaller number for 64-bit encryption, larger number for 128-bit 6. Mark the option to make this a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network. 7. Select OK to save the configuration. This network is added to your list of preferred networks and becomes available to other computers. To turn wireless communication on and off Wireless networks and cellular modems are examples of devices that use wireless communication. Such devices may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as when traveling in an airplane. If in doubt, be sure to ask for authorization before turning on your notebook wireless networking. In Italy, Singapore, and possibly other countries, you may be required to purchase a license before using the wireless function. Turning on communication and making a connection If your notebook has both wireless 802.11 and Bluetooth capabilities, the wireless indicator light on the front of the notebook turns on when Bluetooth or 802.11 communication is turned on, but it does not show whether Bluetooth, 802.11, or both functions are active. You must use the Wireless Configuration software to control the individual wireless functions. 1. If the notebook is not on, turn it on. 2. If you normally press the wireless on-off button on the front of the notebook to turn wireless 802.11 communication on and off, press the button so the indicator light turns on. This restores your previous wireless configuration. or Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Network Connections, then select the wireless network connection icon. If you are within range of your wireless network, your notebook automatically connects. To check the status of your wireless connection, open Network Connections in Control Panel, then select the connection. 42 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Network Connections (select models only) Turning off communication and ending a connection 1. Important: close any files that reside on other network computers. 2. To turn off the wireless 802.11 communication without turning off the notebook, press the wireless on-off button. This also turns off Bluetooth communication if it was enabled. or Right-click the wireless network connection icon in the taskbar, then select Disable. Putting the notebook in Standby or shutting it down also turns off the wireless function. Reference Guide 43 Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections (select models only) Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections
(select models only) If your notebook includes Bluetooth wireless capabilities, you can use it to make short-range radio connections to a wireless personal area network (PAN) and access other Bluetooth-compatible devices, such as other computers, cell phones, and printers. Since the Bluetooth function connects your notebook by radio rather than through cables, you can move around and remain connected, and you can detect new Bluetooth devices automatically when they enter your area. To turn Bluetooth communication on and off Important Wireless communication may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as when traveling in an airplane. If in doubt, be sure to ask for authorization before turning on your notebook wireless networking. In Italy, Singapore, and possibly other countries, you may be required to purchase a license from the responsible authority before using the wireless function. Turning on Bluetooth communication The wireless indicator light on the front of the notebook turns on when Bluetooth or 802.11 communication is turned on, but it doesnt show whether Bluetooth, 802.11, or both functions are active. You must use the Wireless Configuration software to control the individual wireless functions. If your notebook isnt on, turn it on. 1. 2. If you normally press the wireless on-off button on the front of the notebook to turn Bluetooth communication on and off, press the button so the indicator light turns on. This restores your previous wireless configuration. or If the Wireless Configuration icon is present in the taskbar, select the icon, then select the Bluetooth button to turn on Bluetooth communication. 44 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections (select models only) Turning off Bluetooth communication Turning off communication ends any connection you have open. 1. Important: close any files that reside on other network computers. 2. To turn off Bluetooth communication without turning off your notebook, press the wireless on-off button. This also turns off 802.11 communication if it was enabled. or If the Wireless Configuration icon is present in the taskbar, select the icon, then select the Bluetooth button to turn off Bluetooth communication, without affecting 802.11 communication. Turning off the notebook or putting it into Hibernation also turns off the Bluetooth function. To prepare for Bluetooth connections Before you use your notebook to access other Bluetooth devices, you should configure some basic settings. 1. Make sure Bluetooth communication is turned on. 2. Select the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar. 3. In the menu bar, select Bluetooth > Device Configuration. (This menu is available only while Bluetooth folders are selected.) 4. On the General tab, check the following settings:
Give your notebook a unique name that will identify it to other Bluetooth users. Set the computer type to Laptop. Select the security mode you want to use. 5. On the Information Exchange tab, check the following settings:
Check the directory you want to make available to other Bluetooth users for sharing files, both sent and received. Check the directory where you want to store your business card file so you can easily send it to other Bluetooth users. Check the inbox directory where you want delivered files from other Bluetooth users to be stored automatically. Detailed information about these and other advanced settings are included in the online help. Reference Guide 45 Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Bluetooth Connections (select models only) To create your business card, you can open Microsoft Outlook, then open the address book and create a new contact. After entering your personal information, select File, Export To vCard File and store the file in your business card directory. To send or receive files using Bluetooth If your notebook includes Bluetooth wireless capabilities, it supports the following common protocols for transferring data. To use either protocol, both computers must support that protocol. Check the other computers Bluetooth documentation. FTP: files can be copied into and out of shared directories (folders) by both computers. This service is equivalent to common network file sharing. OPP (object push profile): both computers can send certain types of Microsoft Outlook data to the other computers Bluetooth inbox, but cannot retrieve files from the other computer. Sharing files with another Bluetooth device (FTP) 1. Select the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar. 2. In My Bluetooth Places, select and open the other device to view files in its shared directory. 3. Use Windows Explorer or other software to copy or move files between your notebook and the other device. Sending Outlook data to another Bluetooth device (OPP) 1. Select the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar. 2. In My Bluetooth Places, select and open the other device. 3. To send a calendar item, note, or message, select the device inbox, select the option you want, then select the file to send. The file arrives in the device inbox directory. or To send your business card, select the device inbox, then select the option to send your business card. 46 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Reference Guide 47 Add-On Devices Connecting PC Cards Connecting PC Cards The notebook PC Card slot is available for storing data and expanding the communication capabilities of the notebook. The notebook supports standard Type II and III PC Cards (PCMCIA and CardBus). To insert or remove a PC Card Note The location and number of the PC Card slots vary by model series. Inserting a PC Card 1. Hold the PC Card label-side up with its connectors facing the card slot. 2. Slide the PC Card all the way into the bottom of the slot. Most cards are properly seated when the outer edge is flush with the casing of the notebook, but some cards are designed to protrude from the case. 48 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting PC Cards Removing a PC Card CAUTION Before removing a PC Card, you must use the Eject Hardware or Safely Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar, or shut down the notebook. Otherwise, you could lose data. 1. Before removing the card, select the Eject Hardware or Safely Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar, then select the card you want to remove. This protects your data and helps avoid unexpected problems. If needed, you can restart the card by removing and then reinserting it. 2. Press the eject button to pop the button out, then press it in to eject the PC Card. Reference Guide 49 Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices Connecting External Devices To connect an audio device You can plug in an external microphone, external speakers, or headphones. In addition, if you connect your notebook to the port replicator, you can plug in a stereo source (such as a CD player) or a device that accepts digital audio (such as a digital audio recorder). CAUTION The headphone and line-in jacks are three-terminal stereo jacks. They are not compatible with two-terminal mono plugs. Connecting a mono plug into either of these jacks may damage the notebook. Attach the audio cable to the corresponding audio port on the notebook or port replicator. Match your notebook to one of the following illustrations to locate the audio connectors on your notebook. 1 2 External microphone connector (pink) Audio out (headphones) connector (green) 50 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices 1 2 Audio out (headphones) connector (green) External microphone connector (pink) Note When you plug a device into the headphone port, the built-in speakers automatically turn off. When you plug a device into either audio port on the notebook, any device connected to the corresponding port on the port replicator is ignored. Reference Guide 51 Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices To use an external monitor Connecting an external monitor 1. Plug a standard 4-pin S-Video cable to the S-Video out jack on your notebook
(yellow connector on the back panel) to the S-Video in jack on your television. Restart your notebook. Note Although your notebook has a 7-pin S-Video out jack, the notebook accepts either a 7-pin or 4-pin cable connection. 2. Using your mouse, right-click in an empty area of the desktop. 3. Select Properties, select the Settings tab, then select the Advanced button.
-or-
Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. Then, select the Settings tab, select the Advanced button, and select the Displays tab. 4. To enable the TV, select the red button next to TV. Note If the S-Video cable is not plugged into your notebook and TV, the red button will not be displayed. 5. Select Apply to accept the changes. 6. If you are prompted to restart Windows, select Yes. Switching the display to the external monitor Press the TV Now! One-Touch button at the top of your keyboard to switch the display to the external monitor. With the default display settings, the external monitor uses the same settings as the internal display. The external monitor displays the same image as the internal display, regardless of the screen area, colors, and other settings, and the refresh rate is the same as the internal display (60 Hz). If you use only the external monitor, you can select different settings that arent limited by the internal display. 52 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices Adjusting monitor resolution and other settings 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. 2. On the Settings tab, adjust the Screen area. Other settings are also available. If you need to increase the refresh rate on the external monitor, you can switch to only the external monitor. An alternative is to make one display a secondary display so you can select independent refresh rates:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. 2. On the Settings tab, select the Advanced button, then the Displays or Monitor tab. Set the refresh rate on the Monitor tab. Using dual display mode You can extend your desktop by connecting an external monitor to your notebook. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. 2. Select the Settings tab. 3. Select the second display, then select the option to extend the desktop. You can set different resolutions and numbers of colors for each display. However, using the Extended Desktop requires video memory for each display. For this reason, higher resolutions and higher numbers of colors may cause unexpected behavior on the displays. Try starting with 1024 768 resolution on the external display and 64 K colors (16-bit) on both displays. You can then try higher settings to see whether they work for your applications. In addition, certain operations such as playing DVDs and running 3D graphics require extra video memory, so you may have to adjust display settings. If youre playing a DVD movie, the movie will show only on the primary display. To change the primary display, go to the Settings tab of Display Properties (see the steps above), right-click the display you want, and select Primary. To connect an IEEE 1394 device (select models only) If your notebook has an IEEE 1394 port, you can use it to connect devices such as audio and video equipment, disk drives, printers, and other notebooks. Attach the device cable to the IEEE 1394 port. Windows automatically recognizes the device. Reference Guide 53 Note Note Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices The IEEE 1394 port is a 4-wire port. If you want to connect a device that has a 6-wire plug, you can purchase a simple adapter if the device is unpowered, or a hub if the device requires power. If you have problems making this connection, contact the device manufacturer Web site for the latest version of the driver for the device. To connect an infrared device (select models only) Select models include an infrared port. By default, the infrared port is not enabled, so you must first enable it before you can use it. If your model has an infrared port (a small, rectangular lens located on the front of the notebook), then your notebook has wireless, serial communication capability. That is, your notebook and other infrared devices, such as printers or other notebooks, can communicate wirelessly using this port. Using the infrared port Make sure the infrared port of your notebook and the infrared port of the device with which you want to communicate lie in a straight line facing each other. The two ports should be no more than one meter apart with no obstructions in between. Noise from nearby equipment can cause transmission errors. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. Select the Hardware tab. 3. Select the Device Manager button. 4. Select the ALI fast infrared controller, then the Enable Device button. 5. Select Next > Finish > Close. Then close all open dialog boxes. To check the status of communications, open Wireless Link by selecting Start >
Control Panel > Printers & Other Hardware > Wireless Link. Printing to an infrared printer Install your printer and assign it to the notebook infrared port. You can then print from your applications as you would to any other printer. Transferring files through an infrared connection You can use your notebook infrared port to transfer files by using Wireless Link. See the Windows online Help for instructions on using Wireless Link. 54 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices To use a port replicator (select models only) A port replicator provides your notebook with external connections that you can leave in place whenever you remove the notebook from your desk. Instead of disconnecting and reconnecting peripheral devices, you can simply undock and dock the notebook. CAUTION Use only the AC adapter included with your notebook (or other approved adapter that meets the power requirements of the notebook). Do not use a 60-watt, 3.16-amp adapter, and do not use DC adapter accessories F1455A and F2297A. Using the wrong AC adapter could damage the notebook or adapter and cause data loss, and may void your warranty. You can dock or undock the notebook in any power state: on, off, Standby, or Hibernation. Make sure, however, that the notebook is not entering into or resuming from Standby or Hibernation when you dock or undock, or the notebook could lock up. Hint Before docking or undocking your notebook, save your data and close any applications associated with external connections that might be affected. Do this as a precaution against an unlikely docking problem. Reference Guide 55 Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices To dock to the port replicator 1. Plug in the AC adapter, then connect it to the back of the port replicator. You can also operate the port replicator using power from the notebook battery. 2. Remove the rubber cover from the docking connector on the bottom of the notebook. 3. Align the notebook with the locator posts on the port replicator. 4. Press the notebook down until both sides snap into place. 5. If the notebook is off, open it and press the power button to turn it on. The lights on the port replicator turn on. When the notebook is docked, you can use its security connector to secure it. To secure both the notebook and port replicator, install the cable lock in the security connector next to the undock button. This will also lock the undock button. Note If a device is connected to an audio port on the notebook, any device connected to the corresponding port on the port replicator is ignored. 56 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices To undock from the port replicator 1. Press down the undock button on the right side of the port replicator. 2. Lift the notebook out of the port replicator. Reference Guide 57 Add-On Devices Installing Additional RAM (Memory) Installing Additional RAM (Memory) The notebook has two slots that hold two RAM modules. At least one slot contains a RAM module installed at the factory. You can use both slots to expand your RAM. To install a RAM expansion module Use PC2100 DDR-266 MHz or higher RAM only. Youll need a small Phillips screwdriver for these steps. CAUTION The internal components of your notebook are extremely sensitive to static electricity and can be permanently damaged by it. Handle the RAM module only by its edges. Before installing the memory module, discharge your bodys static electricity by touching the metal shielding around the connectors on the back of the notebook. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. 2. Important: unplug the AC adapter, if present, and remove the battery. 3. Turn the unit bottom-side up, loosen the screws holding the RAM cover, and remove the cover. 58 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Installing Additional RAM (Memory) 4. Insert the RAM board into the connector at about a 30 degree angle until it is fully inserted. Then press down at both sides until both latches snap closed. Match your notebook to one of the following illustrations. 5. Replace the cover. 6. Insert the battery. To remove the RAM module, release the two latches at the sides of the module. Reference Guide 59 Add-On Devices Installing Additional RAM (Memory) To remove a RAM expansion module You may want to remove a RAM module so you can install a larger one. You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for these steps. CAUTION The internal components of your notebook are extremely sensitive to static electricity and can be permanently damaged by it. Handle the RAM module only by its edges. Before installing the memory module, discharge your bodys static electricity by touching the metal shielding around the connectors on the back of the notebook. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. 2. Important: unplug the AC adapter, if present, and remove the battery. 3. Turn the unit bottom-side up, loosen the screws holding the RAM cover, and remove the cover. 60 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Installing Additional RAM (Memory) 4. Release the two latches at the sides of the RAM board, so the free edge of the board pops up. Match your notebook to one of the following illustrations. 5. Pull the board out of the connector. 6. Replace the cover. 7. Insert the battery. Reference Guide 61 Add-On Devices Replacing the Hard Drive Replacing the Hard Drive To replace the hard drive You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for this procedure. 1. Unplug the AC adapter, if connected. 2. Remove the battery. 3. Turn the unit bottom side up. 4. Use a pointed tool to remove the plugs from the two screw holes, then remove the two screws. 5. Gently pull the hard drive out of the notebook. 6. Gently slide the new drive into the hard drive compartment. Press firmly to make sure the connector seats properly. 7. Reinstall the hard drive screws and plugs. Important If you are installing a new hard drive, you should create a Utility partition on the drive before loading any software. 62 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Replacing the Hard Drive To replace the hard drive holder If you are installing a new hard drive that does not have a holder, you can remove the holder parts from the old hard drive. You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for this procedure. 1. Remove the four screws from the sides of the holder and drive case, then slide the drive out of the holder. 2. Notice that the hard drive has a pin connector attachment at one end. Carefully remove this connector from the end of the drive. Work alternately at each end so that the connector slides off evenly without bending the connector pins. 3. Carefully put the pin connector attachment back onto the pins on the end of the new hard drive. Work alternately at each end so that the connector slides on evenly without bending the connector pins. 4. Insert the drive into the holder. 5. Reinstall the screws into the holder and drive case. Reference Guide 63 Add-On Devices Replacing the Hard Drive To prepare a new hard drive When you install a new hard drive, you also need to prepare it to be able to work with your notebook. If you want to restore the Windows software and operating system that were originally installed on your notebook, use the QuickRestore System Recovery CD included with your notebook. 64 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Reference Guide 65 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Troubleshooting Your Notebook This chapter contains solutions to many types of problems you might have with your notebook. Try the solutions one at a time, in the order in which they are presented. Here are some other sources of information for troubleshooting:
Use the Windows troubleshooters. Select Start > Help and Support. See the Microsoft Windows manual shipped with the notebook. Select the question mark on the One-Touch key located at the top of the keyboard. Refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet to contact a Customer Care Center for help and support. Audio problems If no sound is audible Select the speaker icon on the taskbar (if present), then clear the Mute All If your model has a volume control, press the + (plus) button to increase volume. checkbox if selected. If your model has an audio mute button, press it so the indicator light goes off. When you are operating your notebook in MS-DOS mode (for example, when running MS-DOS games), you may find that the sound does not operate properly. Use Windows applications for full use of sound capabilities. If sound does not record Plug in an external microphone. The notebook does not have a built-in microphone. Check the software controls for recording sound. Select Start > All Programs >
Accessories > Multimedia (or Entertainment) > Sound Recorder. In Volume Control, select Options > Properties, then make sure the microphone is enabled in the recording controls. 66 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If you hear loud, high-pitched feedback from the speakers In the Volume Control, try reducing the Master volume by selecting the speaker icon in the taskbar. In Volume Control, select Options > Properties, then select the microphone option for the playback settings. Also in Volume Control, make sure the microphone is muted. CD-ROM and DVD problems If you cant boot from a CD or DVD Make sure the CD or DVD is bootable, such as the QuickRestore System Recovery CD included with your notebook. Make sure the CD-ROM/DVD drive is selected as the boot device. See the Basic Operation chapter for directions. Restart the notebook: select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. If a DVD plays erratically Dirt or smudges can cause a disc to skip. Clean the disc with a soft cloth. If the disc is badly scratched, it will probably have to be replaced. If you are playing the DVD on battery power, try changing the power scheme. If you get a Region Code error when playing a DVD movie DVDs can have regional codes embedded in the disc data. These codes prevent DVD movies from being played outside the region of the world in which they are sold. If you get a Region Code error, you are trying to play a DVD intended for a different region. If the notebook cannot read a CD or DVD For a single-sided CD or DVD, make sure the disc is placed in the drive with the label facing up. Clean the disc. Wait 5 to 10 seconds after closing the tray to give the notebook time to recognize the disc. Reference Guide 67 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Restart the system. Remove the disc from the drive, then select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. If you created the CD on a CD/DVD RW combo drive, try using a different media brand. Read and write quality may vary by media. If a DVD movie doesnt fill the screen Each side of a double-sided DVD has a different format (standard or widescreen). In widescreen format, black bands appear at the top and bottom of the screen. To view the standard format, flip the disc over and play the other side. If a DVD doesnt play with two displays If you are using the Extended Desktop (dual displays), move the player window to the display selected as primary. If youre not using Extended Desktop and both displays are active, press the TV Now! One-Touch button at the top of the keyboard to switch to one display. If the notebook cant find Wordpad.exe after inserting a CD The system is trying to open a .doc file in WordPad, but cannot find the Wordpad.exe program file. Type C:\Program Files\Accessories in the error message box. Display problems If the notebook is on, but the screen is blank Move the mouse or tap the TouchPad. This will wake the display if it is off. If the notebook is cold, allow it to warm up. If the screen is difficult to read Try setting the display resolution to its default setting of 1024 768 or higher, depending on your model: select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. Try adjusting the size of the desktop icons and labels. 68 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If an external display does not work Check the connections. The external monitor may not be detected. In the BIOS Setup utility, try setting Video Display Device to Both in the System Devices menu. Hard drive problems If the notebook hard drive doesnt spin Make sure the notebook has power. If necessary, connect the AC adapter, then make sure it is fully plugged into a power source and into the back of the notebook. Remove and reinsert the hard drive. If the hard drive makes a buzzing or whining noise Back up the drive immediately. See whether the noise is coming from elsewhere, such as from the fan or a PC Card drive. If files are corrupted Open My Computer, select the disk you want to scan, then select File >
Properties. Select the Check Now box under the Error-checking section of the Tools Tab. Run the virus-scanning program. If necessary, you can format the hard disk and reinstall the original factory software using the QuickRestore System Recovery CD included with your notebook. Reference Guide 69 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Heat problems Your notebook normally gets warm during routine operation. If the notebook gets abnormally hot Always set the notebook on a flat surface, so that air can flow freely around and underneath it. Make sure the air vents on the bottom and sides of the notebook are clear. Keep in mind that games and other programs that drive CPU usage toward 100 percent can increase the notebook temperature. Infrared problems By default, the infrared port is not enabled, so you must enable it before you can use it. If you have problems with infrared communications Make sure the line between the two infrared ports is not blocked, and that the ports face each other as squarely as possible. (The notebook infrared port is located on the front of the notebook.) The ports should be no more than 1 meter apart. Check settings in the Device Manager:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. On the Hardware tab, select Device Manager and expand the infrared devices. Select the infrared port and make sure that the device is enabled. Make sure only one application is using the infrared port. 70 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Keyboard and pointing device problems Use these suggestions for built-in or external devices. If the pointer is difficult to control Adjust the pointer controls. Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. If the TouchPad doesnt work Press the TouchPad on-off button to turn on the light. Dont touch the TouchPad while the notebook is rebooting or resuming from Standby mode. If this happens, try the following: press a key on the keyboard to restore normal operation. If an external mouse is connected, the built-in pointing devices are normally disabled. You can change this setting with the BIOS Setup utility. See Configuring Your Notebook in this chapter. Restart the notebook. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. If the TouchPad moves the pointer or cursor while you type Press the TouchPad on-off button to turn off the TouchPad while you type. If a PS/2 scroll mouse doesnt work The TouchPad must be disabled for the mouse scroll feature to work. In the BIOS Setup utility, make sure the External Pointing Devices option in the System Devices menu is set to Auto. See Configuring Your Notebook in this chapter. Put the notebook into Standby or shut it down before you attach the scroll mouse, so that it will be detected properly. If you want to use the TouchPad again, you must put the notebook into Standby or shut it down before you detach the scroll mouse. Reference Guide 71 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Local area network (LAN) problems If the built-in network adapter doesnt connect to the LAN Check all cables and connections. Try connecting at a different network station, if available. If the yellow light next to the LAN port does not light, the LAN cable may not be connected to the network or the network may be down. Try connecting a different computer to the cable. Make sure the LAN cable is Category 3, 4, or 5 for 10Base-T operation, or Category 5 for 100Base-TX operation. Maximum cable length is 100 meters
(330 feet). Select Start > Help and Support, then use the Networking troubleshooter. Open the hardware Device Manager. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. If the network interface is disabled, try to enable it. If it has a conflict, try disabling another device. If you cant browse the Network Neighborhood or My Network Places Select Start > Search > Computers or People to look for a computer. If you cant log in to Netware servers If a Netware server is using IPX/SPX protocol, you may need to force your frame type to match the server frame type. Check with your network administrator. If a network connection responds slowly If your network connection uses a proxy server, try enabling the option for bypassing the proxy server for local addresses. You can do this in Control Panel under your network connection properties. 72 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Memory problems If a message says you are out of memory Make sure drive C is not running low on free space. If you are having memory problems while running MS-DOS programs, use the MS-DOS or Application and Software troubleshooter in Windows Help: select Start > Help and Support. The full amount of RAM in your notebook is not available for running applications. A certain amount of RAM is used for display memory. The amount of display memory is shown in the BIOS Setup utility. If memory doesnt increase after adding RAM Make sure your notebook is using only PC2100 DDR-266 or higher memory (RAM) modules. If the notebook beeps but doesnt start after adding RAM You installed an incompatible type of RAM. Remove the module. Modem problems If the modem seems slow Excess static or noise on a line reduces the overall transmission speed of the modem connection. If necessary, contact your telephone company about fixing this type of problem. If youre dialing internationally, line noise is often a problem thats difficult or impossible to eliminate. If you have call-waiting, disable it. Your telephone company can provide instructions. It can cause symptoms similar to static. Eliminate extra connections in the line. If possible, connect directly to the wall jack. Try another telephone line, preferably one normally used for a fax machine or modem. Reference Guide 73 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the modem doesnt dial or no dial tone is detected Check all cables and connections. Connect a standard telephone to the phone line and make sure the line is working. Make sure someone else isnt using the same phone line. Try another telephone line, preferably one normally used for a fax machine or modem. If youre in a foreign country, the dial tone may not be recognized by the modem. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Try disabling the option that waits for a dial tone. If the modem dials incorrectly Check the telephone number you entered, including any digits required for outside access or long distance. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Check the dialing options look for duplicate digits for outside access or long distance. Make sure the number youre calling isnt busy. If youre in a foreign country, the dial tone may not be recognized by the modem. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Try disabling the option that waits for a dial tone. If you have call-waiting, disable ityour telephone company can provide instructions. If the modem dials but doesnt connect Make sure youre using an analog telephone line (2, 3, or 4 wires). You must not use a digital line. In a hotel, ask for a data line. Try another telephone line, preferably one normally used for a fax machine or modem. The modem at the other end may have a problem. Try dialing to a different modem. If the modem isnt detected Check the modem setup. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Check the COM port. 74 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Open the hardware Device Manager: select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. If the modem is disabled, try to enable it. If it has a conflict, try disabling another device. If youre running fax software using fax Class 2, try using Class 1. If the modem dials but you cant hear it If your model has an audio mute light, make sure it is turned off. If its on, press the audio mute button. Check the speaker volume setting. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Select the modem and select Properties, then check the volume setting on the General tab. If the modem connects, but transferred data is bad In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Make sure the parity, speed, word length, and stop bits match on sending and receiving modems. Try a different telephone line, or dial a different server number. If the modem causes an ERROR message A string of AT commands may contain an incorrect command. If you entered commands as extra settings for the modem in Control Panel or in your communications software, check the commands. If youre using fax Class 2 in the fax software, try using Class 1. If the modem doesnt fax Close any other communications programs. If youre faxing by printing from an application, make sure youve selected the fax printer. Try turning off power management features temporarily. If excessive line current is detected Make sure youre using an analog telephone line (2, 3, or 4 wires). You must not use a digital line. In a hotel, ask for a data line. If the modem clicks repeatedly but does not connect Make sure you are using an analog telephone line (2, 3, or 4 wires). You must not use a digital line. In a hotel, ask for a data line. Check all cables and connections. Reference Guide 75 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook PC Card problems If the notebook doesnt recognize a PC Card Remove and reinsert the PC Card. Restart the notebook: select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. Try the card in another computer to see whether the card functions properly. Zoomed Video is not supported. If the card requires an IRQ, make sure one is available. Open the hardware Device Manager: select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance >
System. If a network PC Card stops communicating properly The card may have been reset if the notebook entered Standby or shut off. Exit any applications, then remove and reinsert the card. Check settings in Control Panel. If a PC Card modem is not working Disable the internal modem:
1. Open the hardware Device Manager: select Start > Control Panel >
Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. Select Modem to list the current modem devices. 3. Select the internal modem, then select the option to disable the modem. Performance problems For best performance, your notebook should have at least 128 MB of memory (RAM). If the notebook pauses or runs sluggishly This may be normal Windows behavior. Background processing can affect response time. Certain background operations (such as a virus-scanning program) can affect performance. 76 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Press CTRL+ALT+DEL and use Task Manager to see if an application is not responding. Restart the notebook: select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. Some file browsers respond slowly while processing graphics or waiting for broken network connections to time out. If the notebook hard drive frequently runs (as indicated by the hard drive light on the front of the notebook) while the notebook appears to be paused or running slowly, Windows is likely spending excess time writing to its swap file on the notebook hard disk. If this occurs frequently, consider installing additional memory. Check the amount of available free disk space. Delete temporary and unneeded files. If the notebook stops responding Press CTRL+ALT+DEL and use Task Manager to end the application that is not responding. Press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off and reset the notebook. Any unsaved data will be lost. Then press the power button again to turn the notebook back on. If nothing happens, insert the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook. Then press the power button to turn the notebook back on. To avoid lockup problems, avoid pressing the TV Now! One-Touch button to switch display devices while graphic-intensive applications are running. Also avoid turning the notebook off or putting it into Standby while such applications are running. Power and battery problems If the notebook turns off immediately after it turns on Battery power is probably extremely low. Plug in the AC adapter or insert a charged battery. If the notebook keeps beeping The notebook beeps repeatedly or displays a warning when battery power is low. Save your work, shut down Windows immediately, and insert a charged battery or plug in the AC adapter. Reference Guide 77 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the battery doesnt charge Make sure the AC adapter is fully plugged into the power source and the notebook, and that the light on the Adapter is on. If youre using a power strip, remove the AC adapter from the power strip and plug it directly into a wall outlet. Make sure the battery is fully installed and locked in place. Make sure youre using only the AC adapter included with your notebook (or other approved adapter that meets the power requirements of the notebook). Do not use a 60-watt, 3.16-amp adapter. Move the notebook away from any nearby heat source. Unplug the AC adapter and allow the battery to cool down. If the battery gets too hot, it will not charge properly. If available, try another battery and AC adapter. If the notebook has a short operating time Conserve power using any of the suggestions listed in the Batteries and Power Management chapter in this guide. If you are running an application that has an automatic save feature (such as MS Word), disable this feature or increase the specified save time to reduce hard drive access. If the operating time has gradually become shorter and the battery is more than a year or two old, you may need to replace the battery. Heavy modem use can affect battery operating time. PC Card use can affect battery operating time. Test and recondition the battery every 3 months. If the Time Remaining for the battery is not correct The Time Remaining is an estimate, not a precise value, and is based on the rate at which the notebook is using power at the moment. This value therefore depends on your current task, and assumes that you will continue using power at the same rate until the battery runs out. So, if you check the Time Remaining while the notebook is performing a task requiring a good deal of power (such as reading from a CD or DVD), the value will probably show less time remaining than you really have, since you will probably later switch to tasks that require less power. 78 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the notebook doesnt enter Standby as expected If you have a connection to another computer, the notebook wont enter Standby if the connection is active. If the notebook is performing an operation, it normally waits for the operation to finish before entering Standby. If the notebook doesnt automatically enter Hibernation as expected Make sure Hibernation support is enabled. From Control Panel, open Power Options, then select the Hibernate tab. Check the Power Schemes tab. Make sure the Hibernate timeouts for both AC power and battery power are not set to Never. Printing problems Hint You will usually be able to solve most printing problems by using the Print troubleshooter in Windows Help: select Start > Help and Support. If a serial or parallel printer doesnt print Make sure the printer is on and has paper in it. Make sure you are using the correct printer cable or cable adapter, and that the cable is secure at both ends. Check for printer errors. If the left edge of printed output is missing Certain applications may not work properly with 600-dpi printers. If youre using such a printer, try selecting a compatible printer driver for a 300-dpi printer. If an infrared printer doesnt print Make sure the line between the two infrared ports is not blocked, and that the ports face each other as squarely as possible. (The notebook infrared port is located on the front of the notebook.) The ports should be no more than 1 meter apart. Make sure the printer is on and has paper in it. Check for printer errors. Make sure Windows is running; otherwise infrared printing is not available. Reference Guide 79 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook Serial, parallel, and USB problems If a serial mouse doesnt work Make sure you followed the manufacturers installation instructions completely and have installed the mouse properly. If not, repeat the procedure. Make sure the port connection is secure. Press the power button to enter Standby, and again to resume. Restart the notebook: select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. Check mouse settings in Control Panel: select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. Use a mouse that connects to the USB or PS/2 port. If you have a PS/2 keyboard connected, use a PS/2 Y adapter (HP accessory F1469A). Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Ports (COM & LPT). If a serial modem doesnt work properly Make sure the port connection is secure. Use the Modem troubleshooter in Windows Help: select Start > Help and Support. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options, and check the modem settings. Disable the internal modem:
1. Open the hardware Device Manager: select Start > Control Panel >
Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. Select Modem to list the current modem devices. 3. Select the internal modem, then select the option to disable the modem. Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Ports (COM & LPT). If the serial or parallel port is not working Make sure the port connection is secure. Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Ports (COM & LPT). 80 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the USB port is not working Contact the vendor of the peripheral device for the latest USB drivers. Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Universal Serial Bus Controller. Startup problems If the notebook does not respond when you turn it on Connect the AC adapter. Reset the notebook by inserting the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook. Then press the power button to turn it on. If the notebook still doesnt respond, remove the battery and AC adapter, remove any PC Cards, and undock the notebook if docked. Then plug in the AC adapter again, and reset the notebook using the reset button. If the notebook wont boot from battery power Make sure the battery is properly inserted and fully charged. Check the battery charge by removing it and pressing the pad on the side of the battery. The lights show the charge level. If available, try another battery. If the notebook will not boot from the diskette drive Make sure the diskette drive is selected as the boot device. See the Basic Operation chapter in this guide for directions. If youre using a USB diskette drive, use the BIOS Setup utility to make sure Legacy USB Support is enabled. If your notebook also has a built-in diskette drive, use the BIOS Setup utility Boot menu to make sure the USB diskette drive is the first device under Removable Drive. If the notebook stops responding after booting Check whether you are connected to a TCP/IP network with no DHCP server. This can cause a long delay at startup because DHCP is enabled. Contact your network administrator to determine the proper TCP/IP configuration. Reference Guide 81 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If the notebook takes a long time to resume after entering Standby The notebook can routinely take a minute or more to resume if it has a network card installed. While the operating system is loading drivers and checking hardware and network connections, you will see a blinking cursor on your display. As soon as the hardware has been re-initialized, the Windows desktop will appear. Wireless problems If you have problems with wireless 802.11 communication Make sure the wireless indicator light is on. If your notebook includes Bluetooth capabilities, make sure wireless 802.11 communication is turned on. Select Start > All Programs > Utilities > Wireless Configuration, then select the 802.11 button if its not turned on. Make sure you are using the correct SSID and channel settings. Make sure you are in range of an access point (for an infrastructure connection) or other wireless computer (for an Ad Hoc connection). When you log on to an 802.11 network via an access point, yet your notebook cannot connect to network resources, your notebook may not have been assigned an IP address. If the subnet mask for your wireless connection is 255.255.000.000, the network server did not assign an IP address to your notebook, and you may have to release and renew your network IP address. If this does not fix the problem, the access point may need to be rebooted. If you want to change the SSID to a different value to connect to a different access point, or if you want to change from Infrastructure mode to Ad Hoc mode, you may first have to release and renew the Internet IP address. See Local area network (LAN) problems in this chapter. If you have trouble connecting to another computer in the Network Neighborhood or My Network Places Wait a few minutes, then press F5 to refresh the list of computers on the network. Select Start > Search > Computers or People to locate the computer. If you cannot connect to a particular computer on the network Make sure the computer is properly connected to the network. Make sure your TCP/IP setup is correct for your network: in Control Panel, open Network Connections. 82 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Troubleshooting Your Notebook If you can connect, but the network is slow Check whether you might be in an area served by more than one wireless LAN. If so, the LANs could be interfering with each other. Move closer to the access point (for an infrastructure connection) or other wireless computer (for an Ad Hoc connection). You could be too far away for high-speed communication. If your notebook cannot detect any Bluetooth devices Make sure the wireless indicator light is on. Make sure Bluetooth communication is turned on. Select Start > All Programs >
Utilities > Wireless Configuration, then select the Bluetooth button if its not turned on. If no Bluetooth button is shown, your notebook does not support Bluetooth communication. Make sure the Bluetooth devices are turned on. Some Bluetooth phones must be set for detection and may be detectable by other devices for only a short time. If your notebook cannot detect a certain Bluetooth device Make sure the Bluetooth device is turned on. Some Bluetooth phones must be set for detection and may be detectable by other devices for only a short time. Refresh the list of Bluetooth devices. Select the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar, then select Bluetooth > Search For Devices in the menu bar. Reference Guide 83 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Configuring Your Notebook Configuring Your Notebook The BIOS Setup utility helps you configure your notebook operation. To run the BIOS Setup utility The BIOS (basic input and output system) Setup utility enables you to make changes to the notebook system configuration, and to tailor the operation of your notebook to your individual work needs. The settings made in BIOS Setup generally control the notebook hardware, and so greatly affect how the notebook operates. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. When the logo screen appears, press F2 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. The pointing devices are not active in BIOS Setup, so you will need to use the keyboard to navigate:
Press the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to move among menus. Press the UP and DOWN arrow keys to move among parameters in a menu. Press + or to move through values for the current parameter, or press ENTER to change a setting. 4. After you select the options you want, press F10 or use the Exit menu to exit BIOS Setup. 5. If the settings cause a conflict between devices during reboot, the system prompts you to run BIOS Setup, and marks the conflicting settings. The following tables describe BIOS settings for the BIOS version at publication. If your BIOS is a different version, some settings may differ from those shown. 84 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Configuring Your Notebook Setting BIOS Revision System Time System Date Language Main Menu Description Shows the current BIOS version. Sets the time using 24-hour format. Values set take effect immediately. Sets the date using dd/mm/yy format (except English, which uses mm/dd/yy format). Sets the language for BIOS Setup. Internal Hard Disk Sets the hard drive type and various parameters. UMA Video Memory Memory Serial Number Service ID UUID MAC Address Sets the video memory size allocated from total installed memory (RAM). Shows the extended memory size. Displays the serial number as shown on the back of the unit. Displays an identifier used for repair service. Displays the value of the 16-byte UUID (Universally Unique ID) as 32 hex characters. Displays the MAC network address of the internal
(wired) LAN. Default Detected automatically Detected automatically Detected automatically Auto Detected automatically Detected automatically Detected automatically Detected automatically Detected automatically Reference Guide 85 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Configuring Your Notebook Setting Video Display Device External Pointing Device Legacy USB Support Wake On LAN from Power Off Setting User Password is Administrator Password is Set User Password Set Administrator Password Require Password on Boot Internal hard drive lock System Devices Menu Description Sets whether the built-in display automatically switches to an external display, if one is detected. Disables the internal pointing devices when an external pointing device is connected. Enables BIOS support for USB mouse, keyboard, and diskette disk drive during startup. Lets the notebook be turned on via the LAN port. If this option is enabled, the notebook uses increased power while it is shut down. Security Menu Description Shows if a user password is set. Shows if an administrator password is set. Press ENTER to set, change, or clear the user password. The password can have no more than 8 characters (0-9, A-Z), and cannot include special or accented characters. Press ENTER to set, change, or clear the administrator password, which protects BIOS Setup settings. The password can have no more than 8 characters (0-9, A-Z), and cannot include special or accented characters. Sets whether a user password is required when the notebook boots. Requires the administrator password for changes. Only if the Boot password option is enabled, encodes the current user password (or administrator password if that is the only password set) on the hard drive. Default Auto Auto Enabled Disabled Default Clear Clear Enter Enter Disabled Disabled 86 Reference Guide Troubleshooting and Maintenance Configuring Your Notebook Setting Hard Drive
+Removable Devices CD-ROM Drive Built-in LAN Boot Menu Description Shows the order of boot devices. Move the entries to change the order. If the notebook has more than one device in a + category, you can select the one scanned. Built-in LAN provides diskless boot from a network server. Default 1. Hard Drive 2. Removable Devices 3. CD-ROM Drive 4. Built-in LAN Setting Save Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Get Default Values Exit Menu Description Saves Setup changes, then exits and reboots. Discards any Setup changes made since last save, then exits and reboots. Does not affect password, date, or time changes. Restores default settings, and remains in Setup. Does not affect password, date, or time changes. Default To change video memory settings using BIOS Setup utility The notebook comes with either 32MB or 16MB of video memory. Note Changing your video memory to 8MB, 16MB, 32MB, or 64MB may change the performance of your notebook, depending on your selection. To change your video memory:
1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. Press F2 when the splash screen appears. 3. Move the down arrow key until UMA Video Memory is highlighted. Press Enter to bring up a list of memory settings. Selections include 8 MB, 16MB, 64MB, or Auto. 4. Press F10 to save configuration changes and exit BIOS screen. Reference Guide 87 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Reinstalling and Updating Software Reinstalling and Updating Software Your notebook includes two features that allow you to install individual software applications or to restore the entire original contents of your hard drive:
QuickRestore System Recovery CD, included with your notebook, allows you to restore your hard drive to its original factory contents. Application Recovery utility allows you to restore or install one or more applications. Select Start > Software Setup, then follow the installation wizard on the screen. To replace a damaged QuickRestore System Recovery CD If you lose or damage the QuickRestore System Recovery CD, refer to the service telephone numbers in the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet to contact a Customer Care Center for help and support. 88 Reference Guide Reference Information Reference Guide 89 Reference Information Modem Reference Information Modem Reference Information You can customize the operation of the modem using AT commands and S-registers. You can do this from Phone and Modem Options in Control Panel, from most communications software, or by using terminal mode in your software. Note You should have a good understanding of modems and how they operate before you change default settings. This section contains summary information about AT commands, S-registers, and selected result codes for the built-in modem. Modem Reference (Conexant) All listed AT commands must be preceded by the characters AT (except for the command A/). The commands can be entered in upper or lower case. Many commands can be used as queries by entering ? as the argument. Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Go off-hook and attempt to answer a call. Re-execute command (not preceded by AT). Dial modifier: 09, AD =DTMF digits; L=redial last number; P=pulse dialing; T=tone dialing;
W=wait for dial tone; * (star); # (pound sign); +; !=flash; @=wait for silence; $ or &=wait for credit card dialing tone; ,=return to command state; =dial pause; ^=toggle calling tone. Parentheses, hyphens, and spaces can be used to format dial string and have no other effect. Turn off command echo. Turn on command echo (default). Initiate hang-up sequence. If on-hook, go off-hook and enter command mode. Report product code. Report LSB of stored checksum. Report OK. Report identification codes. Report product description. Report country code parameter. Report modem data pump model and internal code revision. Report modem data pump model and internal code revision. Report OK. Report country. Set speaker volume: 0=off, 1=low (default), 2=medium, 3=high. Activate speaker: 0=off, 1=on during handshaking and off when receiving carrier (default), 2=always on, 3=off when dialing and receiving carrier, on when answering. 90 Reference Guide Command A A/
Dn E0 E1 H0 H1 I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 Ln Mn Command N0 or N1 On P Qn Sn Sn=v T Vn W0 W1 W2 W3 X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 Z
+DR: a
+DR=n
+DS=a,b,c,d
+DS44=a,b,c,d, e,f,g,h,i Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Included for compatibility only; returns result code. 0=go on-line, 1=go on-line and initiate retrain sequence. Force pulse dialing. 0=enable result codes to DTE (default), 1=disable. Select S-register n as default. Set default S-register n to value v. Force DTMF dialing. Report result codes: 0=short form (terse), 1=long form (verbose) (default). Report DTE speed (default). Report line speed, error correction protocol, and DTE speed. Report DCE speed. Report DCE speed and error correction protocol. Report CONNECT result code on connecting. Dial tone and busy detection not reported. Report CONNECT <text> result code on connecting. Dial tone and busy detection not reported. Report CONNECT <text> result code on connecting. Dial tone and busy detection not reported. Report CONNECT <text> result code on connecting. Dial tone not reported, busy signal reported if detected. Report CONNECT <text> result code on connecting. Dial tone and busy signal reported if detected (default). Reset to default configuration. Select error control protocol: NONE=no data compression, V42B=42bis in both directions, ALT=MNP 5 compression. 0=disables extended format "+DR:" intermediate result code, 1=enables. Controls V.42bis data compression function (b, c, and d are optional):
a sets direction(s) of data compression function, seen by DTE: 0=negotiated, no compression;
3=both directions (default). b=0 specifies modem does not disconnect if V.42bis is not negotiated by remote modem as specified by a. c sets maximum number of dictionary entries (2048) that should be negotiated. d sets maximum string length (32 bytes) to be negotiated. Controls V.44 data compression function (b, c, d, e, f, g, h, and i are optional):
a sets direction(s) of data compression function, seen by DTE: 0=negotiated, no compression;
1=transmit only; 2=receive only; 3=both directions (default). b specifies whether modem disconnects if V.44 not negotiated remote DCE as specified in a:
0=do not disconnect (default), 1=disconnect. c: 0=stream method (default), 1=packet method, 2=multi=packet method. d (256 to 2048) sets maximum codewords to be negotiated in transmit direction (default=2048). e (256 to 2048) sets maximum codewords to be negotiated in receive direction (default=2048). f (32 to 255) sets maximum string length to be negotiated in transmit direction (default=32). g (32 to 255) sets maximum string length to be negotiated in receive direction (default=32). h (2048 to 4096) sets maximum size of history buffer to be negotiated in transmit direction
(default=4096). i (2048 to 4096) sets maximum size of history buffer to be negotiated in receive direction
(default=4096). Reference Guide 91 Command
+ESA=a,b,c,d,e, f,g,h
+GCAP
+GCI=n
+GMI
+GMM
+GMR
+GOI
+GSN
+IFC=n,m
+ILRR=n
+IPR=n
+ITF=a,b,c
+PCW=n
+PIG=n
+PMH=n
+PMHF
+PMHR=n
+PMHT=n
+PQC=n
+PSS=n
+VCID=n Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Controls operation of synchronous access mode:
a=0 specifies in transparent sub-mode, modem transmits 8-bit SYN sequence on idle. b=0 specified in framed sub-mode, modem transmits HDLC flags on idle (default and fixed). c=0 specifies in framed sub-mode, modem transmits abort on underrun in middle of frame
(default); c=1 specifies in framed sub-mode, modem transmits flag on underrun in middle of frame, notifies DTE. d: not to be commanded. e=0 specifies CRC generation and checking disabled (default and fixed). f=0 specifies NZRI encoding and decoding disabled (default and fixed). g=255 sets the octet value used in character-oriented framing. h: not to be commanded. Transmit text listing commands that provide additional modem capabilities. Set country of installation using 8-bit country code from Annex A of T.35. Report modem manufacturer. Report modem model. Report modem version, revision, or date. Transmit text identifying the device. Report modem model serial number. Set operation of local flow control between DTE and modem. n =method DTE uses to control data flow from modem: 0=none, 1=XON/XOFF on transmitted data, 2=Circuit 133 (Ready for Receiving) (default). m =method modem uses to control data flow from DTE: 0=none, 1=XON/XOFF on received data, 2=CTS/RTS (default). Report local port rate: 0=disable, 1=enable. Set data rate at which the modem accepts commands when connected: 0 (allows operation only at rates automatically detectable by modem), 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200. Sets transmit flow control thresholds (b and c are optional):
a (20 to 7000) sets threshold (octets) above which modem generates flow-off signal in synchronous access mode (default=128). b (10 to 5000) sets threshold (octets) below which modem generates flow-on signal in synchronous access mode (default=64). c=0 (fixed). Set modem behavior with call waiting: 1=request modem-on-hold and collect caller ID information, 2=hang up, 3=ignore call waiting. 0=enable PCM upstream negotiation, 1=disable (default). Set modem-on-hold: 0=enabled in V.92 mode (default), 1=disabled. Initiate flash hook sequence when in modem-on-hold procedure. Request modem to initiate or confirm modem-on-hold (MOH) procedure and timeout: 0=V.92 modem-on-hold request denied or unavailable, 1 to 13 grant MOH with timeout (1=10 sec, 2=20 sec, 3=30 sec, 4=40 sec, 5=1 min, 6=2 min, 7=3 min, 8=4 min, 9=6 min, 10=8 min, 11=12 min, 12=16 min, 13=indefinite). Set whether modem grants modem-on-hold (MOH) request, and MOH timeout: 0=deny V.92 modem-on-hold request (default), 1 to 13=grant MOH with timeout (1=10 sec, 2=20 sec, 3=30 sec, 4=40 sec, 5=1 min, 6=2 min, 7=3 min, 8=4 min, 9=6 min, 10=8 min, 11=12 min, 12=16 min, 13=indefinite). Use Short Phase startup procedures: 0=enable V.92 Short Phase 1 and 2 (default), 1=enable Short Phase 1 only, 3=disable. 0=modems decide whether to use short startup procedures, 2=use full startup procedures on all subsequent connections. Set caller ID reporting: 0=disable (default), 1=enable with formatted presentation, 2=enable with unformatted presentation. 92 Reference Guide Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Report caller ID: 0=use formatted presentation, 1=use unformatted presentation. Use full startup procedures on next connection, then select startup procedure defined by
+PQC. 0=do not allow modem to save generated quick-connect profile, 1=allow (default). Set RLSD: 0=always on, 1=follow carrier state (default). 0=ignore DTR; 1=upon on-to-off transition, enter online command state and issue OK result code; call remains connected; 2=upon on-to-off transition clear call, discard untransmitted data according to +ETBM. 0=disable line quality monitor, auto-retrain, and auto-rate renegotiation;1=enable line quality monitor, auto-retrain, and auto-rate renegotiation (default). Restore factory configuration. Included for compatibility only; no effect (returns OK). Set DTE/DCE flow control: 0=disable, 3=enable RTS/CTS DTE/DCE flow control (default), 4=enable XON/XOFF DTE/DCE flow control, 5 and 6 included for compatibility only (no effect, returns OK). Included for compatibility only; no effect (returns result code). Set pulse dial (pps) with make/break: 0=10 pps with 39%61% make/break (default), 1=10 pps with 33%67% make/break, 2=20 pps with 39%61% make/break, 3=20 pps with 33%67%
make/break. Select asynchronous operation in error correction mode.
(n=03, 6) Select asynchronous operation in normal mode (speed buffering). Terminate any test in progress. Initiate local analog loopback. Display current configuration and stored profiles. PTT testing of signal level: 0009=DTMF dial 09, 0A=DTMF *, 0B=DTMF #, 0C=DTMF A, 0D=DTMF B, 0E=DTMF C, 0F=DTMF D, 10=V.21 Channel 1mark symbol, 11=V.21 Channel 2mark symbol, 12=V.23 Channel 1mark symbol, 13=V.23 Channel 2mark symbol, 14=Bell103 Channel 1mark symbol, 15=Bell103 Channel 2mark symbol, 20=V22Org, 21=V22Ans, 22=Bell212Org, 23=Bell212Ans, 24=V22BisOrg, 25=V22BisAns, 26=V32@4800, 27=V32@7200, 28=V32@9600, 29=V.32Bis@12000, 2A=V32Bis@14400, 30=Silence, 31=2100Hz MISC, 33=1300Hz MISC, 34=1100Hz MISC, 40=Reserved, 41=V27@2400 FAX, 42=V27@4800 FAX, 43=V29@7200 FAX, 44=V29@9600 FAX, 45=V17@7200LT FAX, 46=V17@7200ST FAX, 47=V17@9600LT FAX, 48=V17@9600ST FAX, 49=V17@12000LT FAX, 4A=V17@12000ST FAX, 4B=V17@14400LT FAX, 4C=V17@14400ST FAX. 5abc: a=bit rate (0=2400, D=33600), b=V.34 symbol rate (0=2400, 5=3429), c=pre-emphasis filter (0 to A). Select normal speed buffered mode. Select normal speed buffered mode. Select reliable (error-correction) mode. Select auto reliable mode. Force LAPM mode. Force MNP mode. Report carrier. Report transmit and receive rates. Disable reporting of modulation connection. Enable reporting of modulation connection (+MCR: and +MRR: are transmitted) (default). Enable reporting of modulation connection (+MCR: and Receive Rate Only: are transmitted). Command
+VRID=n
-QCPC
-QCPS=n
&Cn
&Dn
&En
&F0
&Gn
&Kn
&Mn
&Pn
&Q5
&Qn
&T0
&T1
&V
%TTn
\N0
\N1
\N2
\N3
\N4
\N5
+MCR
+MMR
+MR=0
+MR=1
+MR=2 Reference Guide 93 Command
+MS=a,b,c,d,e,f
+WS=n
%Cn
+EB=a,b,c
+EFCS=0
+ER: a
+ER=n
+ES=a,b,c
+ESR=0
+ETBM=a,b,c
+FAE=n
+FAR=n
+FCL=n
+FCLASS=n
+FIT=n,a Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Select modulation (b, c, d, e, and f are optional). a is the carrier (allowable rates in parentheses): B103 (300), B212 (1200 Rx/75 Tx or 75 Rx/1200 Tx), V21 (300), V22 (1200), V22B (1200/2400), V23C (1200), V32 (4800/9600), V32B
(480014400), V34 (240033600), K56 (3200056000), V90 (2800056000), V92 (downstream: 28000 56000; upstream: 2400048000). b is automode: 0=disabled, 1=enabled (default). c is minimum transmit (Tx) rate (bps). d is maximum transmit rate (bps). e is minimum receive (Rx) rate. f is maximum receive rate (bps). Set PDC mode: 1=disable (default), 20=enable. ECC Commands Set data compression: 0=disable, 1=enable V.42 bis and MNP 5, 2=enable V.42 bis and MNP 5, 3=enable V.42 bis and MNP 5 (default). Select break handling (b and c are optional):
a=0 break is ignored. b=0 transmitted V.42 L-SIGNAL will not indicate break signal length. c=0 break is not delivered to DTE. Select 16-bit FCS specified in V.42. Select error control protocol: NONE=error control not in use, LAPM=V.42 LAPM protocol, ALT=MNP. Error control reporting: 0=disable, 1=enable. Select error control and synchronous mode (b and c are optional). a is requested mode when modem is originator: 0=initiate call with direct mode, 1=initiate call with normal mode, 2=initiate V.42 without detection phase, 3=initiate V.42 with detection phase
(default), 4=initiate MNP, 6=initiate V.80 synchronous access mode when connection is completed. b specifies fallback mode when modem is originator: 0=LAPM, MNP, or normal mode error control optional (default); 1=LAPM, MNP, or direct mode error control optional; 2=LAPM or MNP error control required; 3=LAPM error control required; 4=MNP error control required. c specifies fallback mode when modem is answerer or specifies V.80 synchronous access mode: 1=error control disabled, use normal mode; 2=LAPM, MNP, or normal mode error control optional (default); 3=LAPM, MNP, or direct mode error control optional; 4=LAPM or MNP error control required; 5=LAPM error control required; 6=MNP error control required;
8=initiate V.80 synchronous access mode when connection complete. Disable selective repeat option in V.42. Handle data remaining in modem buffers on call termination (b and c are optional):
a=0 disconnect occurs immediately and buffered transmit data is discarded. b=0 disconnect occurs immediately and buffered receive data is discarded. c=0 modem does not attempt to deliver buffered data and discards data. FAX Class 1 Data/fax auto answer: 0=disable (default), 1=enable. 0=disable adaptive reception (default), 1=enable. Set loss-of-carrier delay in units of 100 ms (n=0 to 255). Set active service class: 0=data mode (default), 1=Fax Class 1, 1.0=Fax Class 1.0 mode, 8=voice mode. Set DTE inactivity timeout n seconds after which modem goes on-hook (a=0) or DCE goes on hook (a=1). 94 Reference Guide Reference Information Modem Reference Information Conexant AT Commands (Advanced Users Only) Function (Conexant) Set flow control type: 0=XON/XOFF and RTS/CTS flow control turned off; 1=XON/XOFF flow control in either direction; 2=RTS for flow control of modem by DTE, and CTS for flow control of DTE by modem. Report modem manufacturer. Report modem model. Report modem version, revision, or date. Set DTE/modem interface rate in bits/sec: 0=automatic detection (default). Receive data with HDLC framing. Receive data. Receive silence, n 10 ms. Transmit data with HDLC framing. Transmit data. Stop transmission and wait, n 10 ms. Voice Commands Select voice mode. Set report ring cadence and timing of RING event code:
a=0 disables ring cadence reporting, a=1 enables. b sets report content: 0=DROF and DRON messages only. Set report control tone cadence:
a=0 disables ring cadence reporting, a=1 enables. b=0 reports CPOF and CPON messages only. Select speakerphone half-duplex (a=0) or full duplex (a=1). Set microphone gain of speakerphone function (0 to 255). Set gain for received voice samples (0 to 255). Set speaker gain of speakerphone function (0 to 255). Set volume (120 to 135). Initialize all voice parameters to defaults. Set initial value for DTE/modem inactivity timer (0 to 255 seconds). Select sources/destinations for analog data. Set automatic hangups: 0=enable, 1=disable, 2=disable automatic hangups in non-voice modes. Set DTE/modem interface rate (0=autobaud). Set delay between ringbacks before modem assumes remote station is off hook (0 to 255 x 0.1 sec). Set delay between ringbacks before modem assumes remote station is off hook (0 to 60 sec). Start voice reception: 0=start without periodic tone production, 1=start with periodic tone production. Set silence detection sensitivity and required period of silence before modem reports silence at end of voice receive. Set voice and silence compression methods, and voice sampling rate. Disable (a=0) or enable (a=1) speakerphone. Set beep duration (1 to 500 x 0.01 sec). Start voice transmission and reception. Send voice tones. Start voice transmission. Command
+FLO=a
+FMI
+FMM
+FMR
+FPR=n
+FRH=n
+FRM=n
+FRS=n
+FTH=n
+FTM=n
+FTS=n
+FCLASS=8
+VDR=a,b
+VDT=a,b
+VDX=a
+VGM=n
+VGR=n
+VGS=n
+VGT=n
+VIP
+VIT=n
+VLS=n
+VNH=n
+VPR=n
+VRA=n
+VRN=n
+VRXn
+VSD=a,b
+VSM=a,b,c,d
+VSP=a
+VTD=n
+VTR
+VTS=string
+VTX
*B
*D Display black-listed numbers. Display delayed numbers. AT* Commands Reference Guide 95 Register S0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S10 S11 S12 S18 S29 S30 S46 S95 Reference Information Modem Reference Information S-Registers (Conexant) Function (Conexant) Number of rings to auto-answer. Ring counter. Escape character. Line termination character. Response formatting character. Command line editing character. Wait time for dial tone. Wait time for carrier. Pause time for dial delay modifier. Carrier loss disconnect time. DTMF tone duration. Escape prompt delay. Test timer. Flash dial modifier time. Disconnect inactivity timer. Data compression control. Range/units 0255/rings 0255/rings 0255/ASCII 0127/ASCII 0127/ASCII 032/ASCII 2255/sec 1255/sec 0255/sec 1255/.1 sec 50255/.001 sec 0255/.02 sec 0255/sec 0255/10 msec 0255/10 sec 136 (error correction w/o compression) or 138 (error correction
& compression) Default 0 0 43 13 10 (line feed) 8
(backspace) 2 50 2 14 (1.4 sec) 95 (95 msec) 50 (1 sec) 0 70 (700 msec) 0 138 Extended result code messages control. 0 Selected Result Codes (Conexant) Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 24 32 33 35 83 Meaning OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER ERROR CONNECT 1200 NO DIAL TONE BUSY NO ANSWER DELAYED BLACKLISTED FAX DATA LINE IN USE 96 Reference Guide Reference Information Safety Information Safety Information Power cords The power cord supplied with the notebook AC adapter should match the plug and voltage requirements for your local area. Regulatory approval for the AC adapter has been obtained using the power cord for the local area. However, if you travel to a different area or need to connect to a different outlet or voltage, you should use one of the power cords listed below. To purchase a power cord (including one for an area not listed below) or a replacement AC adapter, contact your local authorized dealer or Sales and Service office. For any power cord with a fused plug, if you have to replace the fuse, be sure to install an approved fuse. Country or Region Canada Mexico Philippines Taiwan United States East and West Europe Egypt Saudi Arabia Hong Kong Singapore United Kingdom Australia New Zealand Japan India South Africa Argentina Chile China South Korea Rated Voltage and Current 125 Vac (3 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 125 Vac (3 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) 250 Vac (2.5 A) Reference Guide 97 Reference Information Safety Information Battery safety To avoid risk of fire, burns, or damage to your battery pack, do not allow a metal object to touch the battery contacts. Do not disassemble the battery. There are no serviceable parts inside. Do not dispose of the battery pack in fire or water. Handle a damaged or leaking battery with extreme care. If you come in contact with the electrolyte, wash the exposed area with soap and water. If it contacts the eye, flush the eye with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Do not expose the battery pack to storage temperatures above 60 C (140 F). When discarding a battery pack, contact your local waste disposal provider regarding local restrictions on the disposal or recycling of batteries. To obtain a replacement battery, contact your local dealer or sales office. Do not charge the battery pack if the ambient temperature exceeds 45 C
(113 F). Replace only with the same or equivalent type battery pack recommended by the manufacturer. This product contains a lithium-ion or nickel-metal-hydride battery and may require special handling at end-of-life. Laser safety The CD-ROM and DVD drives used with the computer are certified as a Class 1 laser devices according to the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services
(DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard and International Standards IEC 825 /
IEC 825-1 (EN60825 / EN60825-1). These devices are not considered harmful, but the following precautions are recommended:
Ensure proper use by reading and following the instructions carefully. 98 Reference Guide Reference Information Safety Information If the unit requires service, contact an authorized service center. Do not attempt to make any adjustment of the unit. Avoid direct exposure to the laser beamdo not open the unit. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 LED safety The infrared port located on the front of certain models is classified as a Class 1 LED (light-emitting diode) device according to International Standard IEC 825-1
(EN60825-1). This device is not considered harmful, but the following precautions are recommended:
Do not attempt to make any adjustment of the unit. Avoid direct eye exposure to the infrared LED beam. Be aware that the beam is If the unit requires service, contact an authorized service center. invisible light and cannot be seen. Do not attempt to view the infrared LED beam with any type of optical device. CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT LEDSCHTZKLASSE 1 PRODUKT Mercury safety This product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the liquid-crystal display, and may require special handling at end-of-life. Reference Guide 99 Reference Information Safety Information Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of the IEEE 802.11 and Bluetooth internal wireless radio is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community. We therefore believe the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio. 100 Reference Guide Regulatory Information Reference Information Regulatory Information This section presents information that shows how your computer complies with regulations in certain regions. Any modifications to your computer not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the authority to operate the computer in these regions. U.S.A. This computer has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This computer generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this computer does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by removing the units batteries and AC adapter), try the following:
Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna. Relocating the computer with respect to the receiver. Connecting the computers AC adapter to another power outlet. Connections to Peripheral Devices To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, use properly shielded cables with this device. For more information, consult your dealer, an experienced radio/television technician, or the following booklet, prepared by the Federal Communications Commission: How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems. This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402, Stock Number 004-000-00345-4. At the first printing of this manual, the telephone number was (202) 512-1800. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. Reference Guide 101 Reference Information Regulatory Information Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 means the REN is 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call 1-800-652-6672. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should only perform repairs to the equipment specifically discussed in the troubleshooting section of the user guide. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this computer equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. 102 Reference Guide Reference Information Regulatory Information The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.) Declaration of Conformity (U.S.A.) Responsible Party:
Hewlett-Packard Company Manager of Corporate Product Regulations 3000 Hanover Street Palo Alto, CA 94304
+1 (650) 857-1501 declares that the product(s) Hewlett-Packard Company Pavilion ZE4... and XT... series CRVSA-02T1-75 Trade name:
Product name:
Regulatory Model Number:
Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Canada This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed five. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Reference Guide 103 Reference Information Regulatory Information The internal wireless radio complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Le prsent appareil numrique nmet pas de bruits radiolectriques dpassant les limites applicables aux appareils numriques de Classe B prescrites dans le rglement sur le brouillage radiolectrique dict par le Ministre des Communications du Canada. Le composant RF interne est conforme la norme CNR-210 dIndustrie Canada. Lutilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) lutilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. European Union The equipment has been approved in accordance with Council Decision 98/482/EC for pan-European single terminal connection to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) and to a radio-frequency wireless network. However, due to differences between the individual PSTs provided in different countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work in all of the countries of the European Economic Area (Public Switched Telephone Networks). Network compatibility is dependent on internal software settings. Contact your equipment supplier if it is necessary to use the equipment on a different telephone network. Belgium: For outdoor usage only channels 10 (2457 MHz) through 13 (2472 MHz) are allowed. For private usage outside buildings across public grounds over less than 300m, no special registration with IBPT/BIPT is required. Registration to IBPT/BIPT is required for private usage outside buildings across public grounds over more than 300m. An IBPT/BIPT license is required for public usage outside building. For registration and license please contact IBPT/BIPT. France: Restricted frequency band: only channels 10 through 13 (2457 MHz through 2472 MHz respectively) may be used in France. License required for every installation, indoor and outdoor installations. Please contact ART for the procedure to follow. Use with outdoor installations not allowed. 104 Reference Guide Reference Information Regulatory Information Germany: License required for outdoor installations. Check with reseller for procedure to follow. Netherlands: License required for outdoor installations. Check with reseller for procedure to follow. Italy: Indoor or outdoor use in a public area requires a user license. Die Gerte wurden gem Ratsentscheidung 98/482/EC fr den Anschluss an eine einzelne Telefonbuchse im europischen Raum (Public Switched Telephone Network) und drahtlose Funknetzwerke zertifiziert. In Anbetracht der Unterschiede zwischen den einzelnen Telefonnetzen bietet die Zertifizierung fr sich genommen keine absolute Sicherheit, dass die Gerte bei Anschluss an jeder beliebigen Telefonbuchse funktionieren. Sollten Probleme auftreten, wenden Sie sich zunchst an den Gertehersteller. Diese Gerte wurden zum Betrieb in allen Lndern der europischen Wirtschaftsgemein-
schaft entwickelt (Public Switched Telephone Networks). Die Kompatibilitt zum Netz ist von internen Software-Einstellungen abhngig. Wenden Sie sich an den Gertehersteller, wenn Sie die Gerte in einem anderen Telefonnetz einsetzen mssen. Cet quipement a t reconnu conforme aux dcisions du Conseil 98/482/EC relatives la connexion pan-europenne de terminal simple au rseau tlphonique public commut (RTPC) et un rseau sans fil RF. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les RTPC nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du rseau tlphonique public commut. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. Cet quipement a t conu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays membres de la zone d'change europenne (Rseaux Tlphoniques Public Commuts). La compatibilit entre rseaux dpend des paramtres internes du logiciel. Prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement pour savoir s'il est prfrable d'utiliser ce dernier sur un autre rseau tlphonique. Questa apparecchiatura stata approvata in conformit alla Decisione del Consiglio 98/482/EC che regolamenta, in seno allUnione Europea, la connessione di singoli terminali alla rete telefonica pubblica commutata (PSTN) e alla rete wireless in radio frequenza. Tuttavia, a causa delle differenze esistenti tra i singoli servizi PSTN forniti nei diversi paesi, lapprovazione in s stessa non rappresenta una garanzia assoluta di funzionamento su ogni singolo punto di terminazione della rete PSTN. Reference Guide 105 Reference Information Regulatory Information In caso di problemi, per prima cosa rivolgersi al fornitore dellapparecchiatura. Questa apparecchiatura stata progettata per funzionare in tutti i paesi dellArea Economica Europea (reti telefoniche pubbliche commutate). La compatibilit della rete dipende dalle impostazioni interne del software. Rivolgersi al fornitore dellapparecchiatura qualora sia necessario utilizzare questultima su una rete telefonica diversa. Japan Japan Telecommunications Approval Name of Equipment: AMC20493-001-KT5 TELEC approval number: D02-0005JP Name of Equipment: T60H424 106 Reference Guide Reference Information Regulatory Information New Zealand Conexant AMC20493 Data Fax Modem PTC 211/02/071 PTC200 General Warning The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. PTC200 2.11.1 (6) & (7) Compliance Testing (Functional tests) This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. This condition typically applies to 56 kbit/s modems. PTC200 4.5.1 (4) Off-hook Line Impedance This equipment does not fully meet Telecoms impedance requirements. Performance limitations may occur when used in conjunction with some parts of the network. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. PTC200 5.6.1 (3) General Requirements (automatic dialing devices) This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to Telecoms 111 Emergency Service. PTC200 7.5.2 (3) (4) Ringer Sensitivity This device may be subject to ringing or bell tinkle when certain other devices are connected to the same line. If this occurs, the problem should not be referred to the Telecom Faults Service. Associated Software Limits of Compliance Some parameters required for compliance with Telecoms Telepermit requirements are dependent on the application software or PC equipment associated with this device. The application software shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecoms specifications:
The S0 register must contain a value of 0 for no auto-answer or a value of 2 for auto-answer. The S6 register must contain a value of 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7. The factory default of 2 is recommended. The S7 register must contain a value less than 90. The factory default of 72 is recommended. The S10 register must contain a value less than 150. The factory default of 14 is recommended. The S11 register must contain a value greater than 60. The factory default of 95 is recommended. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of the next attempt to the same number. Automatic calls to different numbers shall be not less than 2 seconds apart. Failure to set these parameters correctly could negate the User Rights under the Telecom Terms of Service. Reference Guide 107 Reference Information Regulatory Information Russia International Note Products sold internationally by the manufacturer and its authorized dealers meet the specifications listed on the following page. For regulatory identification purposes, your product is assigned a Regulatory Model Number. The Regulatory Model Number for your product is listed in the declaration below. This regulatory number is different from the marketing name and product number. 108 Reference Guide Reference Information Regulatory Information Hewlett-Packard Company, Personal Systems Group 19310 Pruneridge Ave., Cupertino, CA 95014, U.S.A. Declaration of Conformity (according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014) Manufacturers Name:
Manufacturers Address:
declares that the following product Product Name:
Regulatory Model Number:
Product Options:
conforms to the following product specifications Safety:
HP Notebook PCs CRVSA-02T1-75 Includes all options for analog modems (Conexant) and 802.11b RF devices (Ambit) IEC 60950: 1991 +A1,A2,A3,A4 / EN 60950: 1992 +A1,A2,A3,A4,A11 IEC 60825-1: 1993 +A1 / EN 60825-1: 1994 +A11 Class 1 LED GB4943-1995 EN 55022: 1994 +A1: 1995 +A2: 1997, Class B [1]
CISPR 24: 1997 / EN 55024: 1998 IEC 61000-3-2: 1995 / EN 61000-3-2:1995 +A1: 1998 +A2: 1998 IEC 61000-3-3: 1994 / EN 61000-3-3:1995 GB9254-1998 FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B/ANSI C63.4: 1992 AS/NZS 3548: 1995 Rules and Regulations of Class B TBR 21: 1998, EG 201 121: 1998 EN 301 489-17: 2000 Specific conditions for wideband data HYPERLAN equipment EN 300 328-2: 2000 Technical requirements for Radio equipment Notified Body Number: 0682 Notified Body Address: CETECOM ICT Services GmbH, Untertuerkheimer Str. 6-10, D-
66117 Saarbruecken The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC and carries the CE marking accordingly.
[1] The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer peripherals. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The HP F1454, F1781, F4600, F4814, F4813, F5104, 5950-4334, and 5950-4359 ac/dc adapters used with this product are designed to operate on all power systems, other than IT power systems. EMC:
Telecom:
Radio:
Equipment Class 2 Supplementary Information:
Corvallis, OR, July 17, 2002 European Contact for regulatory topics only: Hewlett Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany. Fax: +49 7031 143143. USA Contact: Hewlett Packard Co., Corporate Product Regulations Manager, 3000 Hanover Street, Palo Alto, CA 94304, U.S.A. Phone: +1 (650) 857-1501. Reference Guide 109 Index A AC adapter compatibility, 11, 55 connecting, 11 AC adapter jack, location, 5 AdHoc wireless network setup, 41 adjusting brightness, 19 volume, 19 airplanes, wireless communication in, 42, 44 ALT GR key, 21 antistatic precautions, 58, 60 Applications key, 21 AT commands, 38 audio adjusting volume, 66 troubleshooting, 66 volume, 19 audio jacks, 3 audio mute button, 3 B battery best use of, 34 checking status, 32 extending life of, 34 installing, 10 location, 2, 3 low power warning, 33 operating time, 34, 78 release latch, 6, 7 safety, 98 saving power, 34 status lights, 32 troubleshooting, 77 BIOS password, 24 BIOS Setup utility Boot menu, 87 Exit menu, 87 external display settings, 86 Main menu, 85 Security menu, 86 using, 84 black list (modem), 37 blackout periods, modem, 37 Bluetooth business cards, 46 configuring, 45 sending files, 46 troubleshooting, 82 tuning on, 44 turning off, 45 wireless, 44 boot device order, 17, 87 Boot menu (BIOS), 87 brightness, adjusting, 19 business cards, 46 C Cable lock, 25 Caps Lock, 9 Cardbus cards, 48 cards, PCMCIA, 48 CD-ROM drive creating or copying CDs, 23 inserting CD, 20, 22 location, 2, 3 removing CD, 20, 22 CDs copying/creating, 23 recommended media, 23 cleaning the notebook, 28 configuring BIOS settings, 84 modem, 38 connecting IEEE 1394 devices, 53 LAN, 39 wireless network, 40 D data protection, 28 DDR-266 RAM, 58, 73 default BIOS settings, 85 devices boot order, 87 temporary boot order, 17 diskette drive location, 5 USB, 81 display BIOS settings, 86 brightness, 19, 28, 34 dual display, 53 dual monitor, 53 extending life, 28 memory, 85 port, 5 secondary, 53 troubleshooting, 68 docking port, 6, 7 drives hard drive holder, 63 replacing hard drive, 62 DVD drive location, 2, 3 setting region code, 23 troubleshooting, 67 E encryption, 40 ergonomics, 10 Exit menu (BIOS), 87 extended memory, 85 external monitor port, 5 F Fn key
+ Back Space (mute), 19
+ F1 (decrease brightness), 19
+ F12 (hibernation), 19
+ F2 (increase brightness), 19
+ F8 (keypad), 19
+ NumLock (scroll lock), 19
+ Page Down (decrease audio), 19
+ Page Up (increase audio), 19 H hard drive caring for, 28 Hibernation partition, 62, 87 holder, 63 location, 6, 7 protecting, 27 replacing, 62 troubleshooting, 69 Hibernation status lights, 8 Reference Guide 111 Hibernation mode definition, 16 Hibernation partition, 62, 87 hot keys, 19 hot notebook, 70 I IEEE 1394 port connecting devices, 53 location, 5 infrared communication troubleshooting, 70 infrared port location, 2, 3 printing, 54 safety, 99 troubleshooting, 70 inserting CD, 20, 22 DVD, 20, 22 PC card, 48 installing battery, 10 hard drive, 62 hard drive holder, 63 Internet Service Provider, 36 K keyboard ergonomic precautions, 10 non US, 21 status lights, 2, 3, 9 troubleshooting, 71 Keypad Lock, 2, 3, 9 L LAN connecting to, 39 troubleshooting, 72 wireless, 40 LAN port indicator lights, 39 location, 5 laser safety, 98 lights LAN port, 39 status, 2, 3, 8, 9 locking notebook, 24 LPT1 port, 5 M Main menu (BIOS), 85 maintenance notebook configuration, 84 software installation, 88 memory extended, 85 PC2100 DDR-266, 58, 73 troubleshooting, 73 video, 85 Mini PCI location, 6, 7 modem AT commands, 38 black list, 37 blackout periods, 37 built-in, 12 port location, 5 settings, 38 software, 36 troubleshooting, 73 monitor BIOS settings, 86 port, 5 resolution, 53 mouse, troubleshooting, 71 mute button location, 3 N network connecting to, 39 LAN, See LAN wireless, See wireless network Norton AntiVirus, 25 notebook caring for, 27 changing BIOS settings, 84 cleaning, 28 opening/closing, 2, 3 protecting, 27, 70 resetting, 17 timeouts, 31 turning on, 13 Num Lock, 9 O off button location, 2, 3 status lights, 8 turning off, 16 on button, location, 2, 3 One-Touch buttons location, 2, 3 using, 20 overheating, 70 P parallel port location, 5 troubleshooting, 80 password, 24 PC card slot, location, 5 PC cards installing, 48 saving power, 34 stopping, 49 troubleshooting, 76 PC2100 DDR-266 RAM, 58, 73 PCMCIA cards, 48 phone cord, connecting, 12 plug requirements, 97 port locations, 5 power connecting AC, 11 saving, 34 troubleshooting, 77 power button location, 2, 3 resetting with, 17 power cords, 97 power management automated, 30 schemes, 31 printing infrared printers, 54 troubleshooting, 79 protection Cable lock, 25 Norton AntiVirus, 25 PS/2 port, 2, 5 Q Quick Lock, 24 QuickRestore System Recovery CD using, 88 R RAM location, 6, 7 PC2100 DDR-266, 58, 73 112 Reference Guide rebooting boot device, 87 temporary boot device, 17 region code, 23 regulatory information, 101 removing CD, 20, 22 DVD, 20, 22 hard drive, 62 hard drive holder, 63 PC card, 49 reset button, 17 resetting, 17 S safety battery use, 98 infrared port, 99 laser, 98 power cords, 97 wireless communication, 42, 44 safety information, iii saving battery power, 34 scroll pad, 3 scroll pad, 2 secondary display, 53 security cable lock, 5 Cable lock, 25 Norton AntiVirus, 25 Security menu (BIOS), 86 serial port troubleshooting, 80 setting up, 10 Standby and display life, 28 resuming and, 82 saving power, 34 status lights, 8 troubleshooting, 82 Standby mode definition, 16 timeout, 16 startup, troubleshooting, 81 static electricity, 58, 60 status lights battery charge, 32 keyboard, 2, 3, 9 location, 2, 3 meanings, 8 S-Video port, 5 T temperature, overheating, 70 1394 devices, connecting, 53 1394 port, 53 timeouts, notebook, 31 TouchPad location, 2, 3 troubleshooting, 71 troubleshooting audio, 66 battery, 77 CD/DVD drive, 67 display, 68 hard drive, 69 infrared communications, 70 keyboard, 71 LAN, 72 memory, 73 modem, 73 overheating, 70 parallel port, 80 PC card, 76 performance, 76 pointing devices, 71 power, 77 printing, 79 resuming, 82 serial port, 80 Standby, 82 startup, 81 USB, 80 wireless communication, 82 turning on notebook, 13 typing special characters, 21 U USB diskette drive, 81 port location, 5 third port location, 3 troubleshooting, 80 V ventilation, 27, 70 video memory, 85 virus protection, 25 voltage requirements, 97 volume adjusting, 19 troubleshooting, 66 volume control, 3 W Windows key, 21 password, 24 setting up, 13 wireless communication Bluetooth, 44 configuring (Bluetooth), 45 indicator light, 2, 3, 42, 44 on-off button, 40 restrictions on use, 42, 44 status, 42 troubleshooting, 82 turning off (Bluetooth), 45 turning on, 42 turning on (Bluetooth), 44 wireless network AdHoc, 41 connecting to, 40 Reference Guide 113
1 2 3 4 5 6 | User Guide Main PP2160 | Users Manual | 2.64 MiB |
307502-003.book Page i Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM b Getting Started Compaq Notebook Series Document Part Number: 307502-003 March 2003 This guide explains how to set up your hardware and software, begin using the notebook, identify hardware components, and contact Compaq if you need assistance. 307502-003.book Page ii Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM 2003 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. All other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. The information in this document is provided "as is" without warranty of any kind, and is subject to change without notice. The warranties for HP products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements accompanying such products. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. Getting Started Third Edition March 2003 First Edition October 2002 Document Part Number: 307502-003 307502-003.book Page iii Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Using This Guide This preface explains how to interpret the symbols, text styles, and paths in your notebook documentation. Warnings, Cautions and Notes Warnings and cautions contain important information that can protect you, your work, and your system. Notes contain additional information about a topic. Some notes provide basic information for inexperienced users. Others provide technical information for advanced users. The following icons identify warnings, cautions, and notes. WARNING: The information in a warning alerts you to potential bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: The information in a caution alerts you to potential damage to your work, your notebook, or an optional external device. The information in a note provides supplementary information for inexperienced or advanced users. Getting Started iii 307502-003.book Page iv Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Using This Guide Text Styles Some text in your notebook documentation is styled typographically to help you interpret the information it contains. The following table explains the text styles used in your notebook documentation. Style keys commands Initial Capital Letters Explanation Identifies a key, such as the enter key, on the notebook keyboard or on an optional external keyboard. A plus sign (+) between 2 or more keys indicates that they are a key combination. To use most key combinations:
Press and hold the first key, press and hold each succeeding key, then release all the keys at the same time. Unless you are instructed to do so, do not press the keys in a key combination simultaneously. Identifies characters you are asked to type. For example, to visit the Compaq Web site, you are asked to type http://www.compaq.com into the address field on your Web browser. Identify labels or options you can choose on the screen. For example, in a procedure for displaying an icon on the taskbar, you might be asked to select the Always Show Icon On The Taskbar check box. iv Getting Started 307502-003.book Page v Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Using This Guide Following a Path Instructions in documentation may direct you to a destination within the operating system, an application, or a utility where you can select settings. The greater than symbol (>) is used to direct you along the path to the settings. The paths described in your notebook documentation are based on the notebook pointing device default functions:
To select, press the left TouchPad button 1 once. To double-click, press the left TouchPad button twice. To right-click, press the right TouchPad button 2 once. Most paths to Windows destinations begin with Start >. To select Start (and display the Windows Start menu), select the Start button in the lower left corner of your screen or press either of the Microsoft logo keys 3 on the keyboard. Identifying TouchPad buttons and Microsoft logo keys
(Keylocations and availability vary by region and model.) Getting Started v 307502-003.book Page vi Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Using This Guide vi Getting Started 307502-003.book Page vii Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Contents Using This Guide 1 Setting Up the Notebook Setting Up the Hardware . 11 Inserting a Battery Pack. 12 Opening the Notebook. 13 Connecting the Notebook to External Power . 14 Turning On the Notebook . 16 Setting Up the Software . 17 Turning Off the Notebook . 18 Protecting the Notebook from Power Surges. 18 Using the Notebook Safely . 19 2 Beginning to Use the Notebook Selecting Regional Settings . 21 Selecting Screen Settings . 21 Protecting the Notebook Against Viruses . 22 Obtaining Modem and Network Information . 22 Installing Optional Software . 23 Using the Documentation Library CD . 24 Inserting the Documentation Library CD . 24 Accessing the Documentation Library Menu . 25 Selecting a Guide. 26 Finding a Topic Within a Guide . 27 Contacting Compaq . 28 Using Compaq Help and Support . 28 Obtaining Support Telephone Numbers . 28 Getting Started vii 307502-003.book Page viii Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Contents Preparing to Call Technical Support . 29 Taking the Notebook to a Service Provider. 29 Index 3 Hardware Components Display . 31 Pointing Device and Speakers . 32 Top . 33 Power/Standby Light, Battery Light and Vent . 33 Panel Lights . 34 Power Controls . 35 Keys . 36 Rear Panel . 37 Connectors and Infrared Port. 37 Jacks, Fan and Vent . 38 Left Side . 39 Right Side. 310 Volume Buttons and Audio Jacks . 310 Optical Drive and PC Card Slot . 311 Underside . 312 Battery Bay and Hard Drive Bay. 312 Memory Compartment and Vent. 313 Labels. 314 Additional Standard Components . 315 Software Restore and Documentation CDs . 315 Cables and Cord. 316 Adapters and Battery Pack . 317 viii Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM 1 Setting Up the Notebook Setting Up the Hardware To set up the notebook for the first time, you need the notebook, the AC adapter 1, and the power cord 2. If a battery pack shipped with your notebook, you will also you also need the battery pack 3. During the hardware setup, you will:
1. Insert the battery pack, if available, so the battery can begin to charge. 2. Open the notebook so you can monitor indicator lights during setup. 3. Connect the notebook to external power and turn on the notebook so you can begin software setup. Identifying the AC adapter, power cord, and batterypack (AC adapters and power cords vary by region.) Getting Started 11 307502-003.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Setting Up the Notebook Inserting a Battery Pack If your notebook shipped without an optional battery pack, proceed to the next section, Opening the Notebook. If your notebook shipped with a battery pack:
1. Turn the notebook underside up on a flat surface. 2. Lower the battery pack into the battery bay at a slight angle 1, then press downward until the battery pack is seated 2. 3. Slide the 2 battery pack locking latches to the locked position 3. Installing a battery pack CAUTION: To ensure that the correct drivers load and to prevent file corruption or damage to components during initial setup, do not remove the battery pack until the notebook has been connected to external AC power. 12 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Setting Up the Notebook Opening the Notebook To open the notebook:
1. Place the notebook display side up on a flat surface near an electrical outlet. 2. Slide the display release latch 1 as you raise the display 2. Opening the notebook Getting Started 13 307502-003.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Setting Up the Notebook Connecting the Notebook to External Power To connect the notebook to external power:
1. Plug the AC adapter cable into the AC power connector 1. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2, then into an accessible electrical outlet 3. Connecting the notebook to external power (AC adapters, power cords, and outlets vary by model and region.) 14 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 5 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Setting Up the Notebook When the notebook receives AC power:
The AC adapter light 1 turns on. An inserted battery pack begins to charge. The battery light 2 turns on when the battery pack begins to charge and turns off when the battery pack is fully charged. Compaq recommends that you leave the notebook connected to external power until the battery pack is fully charged and the battery light turns off. (A partially charged new battery pack can run the notebook after initial software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery pack has been fully charged.) Identifying the AC adapter light and the battery light Getting Started 15 307502-003.book Page 6 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Setting Up the Notebook Turning On the Notebook To turn on the notebook, press the power button 1. When the notebook turns on, the power/standby light 2 turns on, and you are prompted to begin software setup. Turning on the notebook If the notebook does not turn on:
Make sure that the AC adapter is securely plugged into an electrical outlet. Make sure that the outlet is providing power. (To confirm that the outlet is providing power, plug another device into the outlet.) If you have installed a battery pack, make sure that the battery pack is firmly seated. 16 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 7 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Setting Up the Notebook Setting Up the Software A prompt to set up the software is displayed on the screen when the notebook is connected to external power and turned on for the first time. Before responding to the prompt and proceeding through the on-screen instructions, read the following caution and other installation information. CAUTION: To prevent file corruption and be sure that the correct device drivers install, during software setup:
Run the notebook on external power provided through an AC adapter or a DC cable, not on battery power. Do not unplug the notebook from the electrical outlet. Do not shut down the notebook. After beginning the software setup, you must complete the entire process without interruption. Setup time varies. If you are prompted to select a language, choose carefully. The languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during the installation. When you are prompted to accept the End User License Agreement, you must choose Accept to continue the software setup. During setup, it is normal for some notebook models to pause occasionally for up to 2 minutes and to restart several times. These pauses and restarts occur only during initial software setup. They will not occur during standard Windows startups. Getting Started 17 307502-003.book Page 8 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Setting Up the Notebook Turning Off the Notebook Turn off the notebook by using the Windows shutdown procedure: Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If the notebook does not respond to the Windows shutdown procedure, try the following emergency shutdown procedures:
Press and hold down the power button for at least 5 seconds. If the notebook remains unresponsive, press Fn+power button. If the notebook still remains unresponsive, disconnect the notebook from external power and remove the battery pack. Protecting the Notebook from Power Surges To protect the notebook from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm:
Plug the notebook power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Provide surge protection on the cable that connects a modem to the telephone line. During an electrical storm, run the notebook on battery power or shut down the notebook and disconnect the power cord. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. 18 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 9 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Setting Up the Notebook Using the Notebook Safely To learn more about protecting yourself, your work, and your notebook from electrical and other risks, read the following warnings:
WARNING: The notebook is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the notebook to feel warm or hot when used continuously. To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or use the notebook on your lap for extended periods. The notebook complies with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the international Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (ICE 60950). This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. For notebooks with built in radio please refer to the WLAN card user guide for the related RF exposure requirements. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment:
Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the product by unplugging the power cord from the electrical outlet. If provided with a three-wire power supply cord having a three-pin attachment plug, plug the cord into a grounded
(earthed) outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety &
ComfortGuide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at <<www.compaq.com/ergo>> and on the hard drive or on the Documentation LibraryCD that is included with the product. Getting Started 19 307502-003.book Page 10 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Setting Up the Notebook 110 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM 2 Beginning to Use the Notebook Selecting Regional Settings Keyboard language and other regional preferences, such as time, date, and currency format, are set in the Regional Options window of the operating system. To access the Regional Options window, select Start > Control Panel > Date, Time, Language and Regional Options icon. For information about selecting regional settings, open the Regional Options window, then use context-sensitive Help. To use context-sensitive Help, select the question mark button in the upper right corner of the window, then select an item. A definition, explanation, or procedure is displayed. Selecting Screen Settings Screen appearance settings are accessed from the operating system Appearance and Themes window. To access the Appearance and Themes window, select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes icon. To access the settings that control the size of the items displayed on the screen, select the Change Resolution task. For information about any of the items in any of the windows accessed from the Appearance and Themes icon, use context-sensitive Help. To use context-sensitive Help, select the question mark button in the upper right corner of a window, then select an item. A definition, explanation, or procedure is displayed. Getting Started 21 307502-003.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Beginning to Use the Notebook Protecting the Notebook Against Viruses When you use the notebook for email, network, or Internet access, you expose the notebook to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, your applications, or your utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair damage they have caused. Compaq strongly recommends that you install optional antivirus software before using a modem or network connection. Antivirus software is available from most computer or electronics retailers. Obtaining Modem and Network Information For information about connecting an optional internal modem or NIC (network interface card), refer to the Modem and Networking guide on the Documentation Library CD included with the notebook. Instructions for using the Documentation Library CD are provided later in this chapter. For information about setting up an optional internal wireless LAN device, refer to the documentation included with the device. 22 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Beginning to Use the Notebook Installing Optional Software Step-by-step instructions for installing and using many of the applications and utilities included with the notebook are provided on the Documentation Library CD included with the notebook. Instructions for using the CD are provided next in this chapter. If you prefer to install optional software now, without referring to the Documentation Library CD, the following information may be helpful:
CAUTION: To prevent file corruption and ensure that the correct drivers are installed, install software only when the notebook is connected to external power through the AC adapter or a DC cable. (Do not install software while the notebook is running on battery power.) During the installation:
Do not unplug the notebook from external power. Do not shut down the notebook. To install an application or a utility from a CD, refer to the documentation included with the CD. Typically, installation instructions are included in the CD package or are displayed on the screen when the CD is inserted. To access preloaded utilities and applications, select Start > All Programs > Software Setup. Then:
To display the descriptions and space requirements of a preloaded utility or application without installing it, select the Next button, then select an item. (A description and the space requirements of the item are displayed in the Select Components window.) After viewing the information, select the Cancel button. To install a preloaded utility or application, select the item > Next button, then follow the instructions on the screen. Getting Started 23 307502-003.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Beginning to Use the Notebook Using the Documentation Library CD The Documentation Library CD is included with all notebook models. Inserting the Documentation Library CD To insert the Documentation Library CD into the optical drive:
1. Turn on the notebook. 2. Press the release button 1 on the drive bezel to release the media tray, then pull the tray outward until it is fully extended 2. 3. Position the CD over the tray, label side up. 4. Gently press the center of the disc onto the tray spindle 3 until the disc snaps into place. Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surfaces. (If the media tray is not fully extended, tilt the disc to position it over the tray spindle, then press it downward into position.) 5. Close the media tray 4. Inserting the Documentation Library CD into an optical drive 24 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 5 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Beginning to Use the Notebook Accessing the Documentation Library Menu Typically, when the Documentation Library CD is inserted into the optical drive, the CD menu is displayed on the screen after a pause of up to several seconds. If the menu is not displayed, for example, if AutoPlay is disabled, you can display the menu manually:
1. Select Start > Run. 2. In the Open field, type:
explorer x:
(where X is your optical drive designation). 3. Select the file that includes an .exe extension, for example, Filename.exe. 4. Select the OK button. To display the drive designation of your optical drive, select Start > My Computer. A drive designation is a letter of the alphabet that the notebook uses to identify a drive. If messages about Adobe Acrobat Reader are displayed on the screen as you open the Documentation Library CD, choose to install Acrobat Reader and to accept the Acrobat Reader license agreement. Acrobat Reader is an application that displays the notebook documentation on the screen. Getting Started 25 307502-003.book Page 6 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Beginning to Use the Notebook Selecting a Guide This section describes the guides on the Documentation Library CD and suggests ways to quickly find a topic within a guide. For information about using documentation symbols, text styles, and paths, see the Preface, Using This Guide. For Information About These Topics Select This Guide Using the external hardware features Hardware Guide identified in Chapter 3 of this guide Running the notebook on a battery pack Upgrading memory Power and environmental specifications Using Standby and Hibernation and selecting power preferences Using CD and DVD software Updating or restoring Compaq software Using the Setup and Support utilities Caring for the notebook and drives Preparing the notebook for transport Traveling with the notebook internationally Solving notebook problems yourself Getting help from Compaq Software Guide Maintenance, Shipping and Travel Troubleshooting Governmental and safety information Protecting the notebook from static Regulatory and Safety Notices electricity Ergonomic and safety information Safety & Comfort Guide Continued 26 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 7 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Beginning to Use the Notebook For Information About These Topics Select This Guide Using an internal modem Using a network connection Modem and Networking Using modem AT commands Selecting a command set for your notebook Using AT commands with a Conexant modem Using AT commands with a Lucent/Agere modem Modem Command Guidelines (Advanced UsersOnly) Conexant Command Set (Advanced UsersOnly)*
Lucent/Agere CommandSet
(Advanced UsersOnly)*
*Available in English only. Finding a Topic Within a Guide To find information within a guide:
Use the bookmarks or search features in Acrobat Reader. Select any plus sign (+) in the left pane of the Acrobat Reader window to display subheadings. Select Edit > Find or Edit > Search to search quickly for a topic. Select the Help button for additional information about Acrobat Reader search, navigation, and print procedures. Use the Index in the guide. Indexes list specific items under generic headings, such as button, or jack, that may be helpful if you do not know the name of an item. Index listings direct you to the first page of a topic. You may find more information about the topic by scrolling through a few of the pages that follow. Getting Started 27 307502-003.book Page 8 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Beginning to Use the Notebook Contacting Compaq If you encounter a notebook problem that you cannot resolve with the information provided, you may need to contact Compaq. Using Compaq Help and Support To access Compaq Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support, then select a link. Links to support features within the notebook and to specific areas of the Compaq Web site are provided. Obtaining Support Telephone Numbers To obtain a list of worldwide Technical Support telephone numbers, use either of the following methods:
Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > System icon. Then, near the lower edge of the System Properties window, select the Support Information button. Refer to the printed Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the notebook in English only. 28 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 9 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Beginning to Use the Notebook Preparing to Call Technical Support To provide the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the notebook and the following information available when you call:
Serial number, model number, and model description, which are provided on the product identification label on the underside of the notebook. Purchase date on the invoice. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > System icon > General tab. Brand and model of an optional printer. Taking the Notebook to a Service Provider In addition to providing the information listed in the preceding section, Preparing to Call Technical Support, be sure to delete all passwords or to disclose all passwords to the service provider. Getting Started 29 307502-003.book Page 10 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Beginning to Use the Notebook 210 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM 3 Hardware Components Display Display 1 Display release latch Opens the notebook. Getting Started 31 307502-003.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Hardware Components Pointing Device and Speakers Pointing Device and Speakers 1 TouchPad*
Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Can be set to perform additional mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-clicking. 2 Left and right TouchPad buttons*
Function like the left and right buttons on an external mouse. 3 Stereo speakers (2) Produce stereo sound.
*This table describes default settings. For information about changing pointing device functions, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Hardware Guide, Pointing Device and Keyboard chapter. 32 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Hardware Components Top Power/Standby Light, Battery Light and Vent Top: Power/Standby Light, Battery Light, and Vent 1 Power/standby light 2 Battery light 3 Vent*
On: Power is turned on. Flashing: Notebook is in Standby or has reached a critical low-battery condition. On: A battery pack is charging. Flashing: A battery pack which is the only available power source has reached a low-battery condition. Provides airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents.
*The notebook has 3 vents. The other vents are on the rear panel and the underside of the notebook. Getting Started 33 307502-003.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Hardware Components Panel Lights Top: Panel Lights 1 Wireless LAN activity light 2 AC adapter light Off: An optional internal wireless LAN is off or not installed. On: An optional internal wireless LAN is on and connected to a network. Flashing: An optional internal wireless LAN is on, but is not connected to a network or properly configured. On: AC power is being supplied through an AC adapter. 3 IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) drive light On: The internal hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. 4 Num lock light On: Num lock or the internal keypad is on.*
5 Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on.
*For information about using the internal keypad, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Hardware Guide, Pointing Device and Keyboard chapter. 34 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 5 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Power Controls Hardware Components Top: Power Controls 1 Power button* When the notebook is:
Off, press to turn on the notebook. On, briefly press to initiate Hibernation. In Standby, briefly press to resume from Standby. In Hibernation, briefly press to resume from Hibernation. If the system has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold for at least 5 seconds to turn off the notebook. 2 Display switch*
If the notebook is closed while on, turns off the display. If the notebook is opened while in Standby, turns on the notebook (resumes from Standby).
*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the function of the power button or display switch, refer on the Documentation LibraryCD to the Software Guide, Power chapter. Getting Started 35 307502-003.book Page 6 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Hardware Components Keys Key availability and location varies by region and model. Top: Keys 1 Function keys (12) 2 Fn key 3 Keypad keys (15)*
4 Microsoft logo keys (2) 5 Applications key Perform system and application tasks. When combined with the Fn key, the function keys F2 through F4 and F7 through F12 perform additional tasks as hotkeys.*
Combines with other keys to perform system tasks. For example, pressing Fn+F7 decreases screen brightness and pressing Fn+F8 increases screen brightness. Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Display the Windows Start menu. Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer.
*For information about using hotkeys or keypad keys, refer on the Documentation LibraryCD to the Hardware Guide, Pointing Device and Keyboard chapter. 36 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 7 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Hardware Components Rear Panel Connectors and Infrared Port Rear Panel: Connectors and Infrared Port 1 Infrared port (available on select models) Provides wireless communication between the notebook and an optional IrDA-compliant device. 2 Parallel connector (available on select models) Connects an optional parallel device such as a printer. 3 External monitor connector Connects an optional VGA external monitor or projector. 4 USB connectors (4) 5 AC power connector Connect optional 2.0- or 1.1-compliant USB devices. Connects an AC adapter or an optional DC cable. Getting Started 37 307502-003.book Page 8 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Hardware Components Jacks, Fan and Vent Rear Panel: Jacks, Fan, and Vent 1 RJ-45 network jack
(available on select models) 2 Composite TV-out jack 3 RJ-11 telephone jack 4 Fan and vent*
Connects an Ethernet network cable.
(An Ethernet network cable is included with select models.) Connects an optional composite video device, such as a television, VCR, camcorder, projector, or video capture card. Connects a modem cable. (A modem cable is included with select models.) Provide airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Do not allow a hard surface, such as an adjoining printer, or a soft surface, such as bedding or clothing, to block airflow.
*The notebook has 3 vents. The other vents are above the keyboard and on the underside of the notebook. 38 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 9 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Left Side Hardware Components Left Side 1 Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the notebook. 2 Hard drive bay Holds the internal hard drive. 3 1394 connector (available on select models) Connects an optional 1394 device such as a camcorder. Getting Started 39 307502-003.book Page 10 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Hardware Components Right Side Volume Buttons and Audio Jacks Right Side: Volume Buttons and Audio Jacks 1 Volume buttons (2) 2 Microphone jack 3 Audio-out jack Adjust, mute, or restore system volume. To decrease volume, press the decrease volume button. To increase volume, press the increase volume button. To mute or restore volume, press both buttons at the same time. Connects an optional monaural microphone. Connects optional headphones or powered stereo speakers. Also connects the audio function of an audio/video device such as a television or VCR. 310 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 11 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Optical Drive and PC Card Slot Hardware Components Right Side: Optical Drive and PC Card Slot 1 Optical drive*
Supports an optical disc. 2 PC Card eject button
(available on models with a PC Card slot) Ejects an optional PC Card from the PC Card slot. 3 PC Card slot (available on select models) Supports an optional Type I or Type II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card.
*The type of optical drive, for example a CD, DVD, or combination CD/DVD drive, varies by model. Getting Started 311 307502-003.book Page 12 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Hardware Components Underside Battery Bay and Hard Drive Bay Underside: Battery Bay and Hard Drive Bay 1 Battery bay*
Holds a battery pack. 2 Battery pack release latch*
3 Battery pack locking latches (2)*
4 Hard drive retaining screws (4) Releases a battery pack from the battery bay. Secure a battery pack in the battery bay. Secure the internal hard drive in the hard drive bay.
*All models support a battery pack and include a battery bay, battery pack release latch, 2 battery pack locking latches, and a battery light (The battery light is illustrated earlier in this chapter). As shipped, the battery bay is empty on models which include a battery pack. The battery bay on models which do not include a battery pack contains a removable stabilizer, which protects the battery bay. 312 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 13 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Memory Compartment and Vent Hardware Components Underside: Memory Compartment and Vent 1 Memory compartment 2 Vent*
Contains 2 memory slots for PC2100-compliant memory modules. The memory compartment may contain one or two memory modules, depending on the notebook model. Allows airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct the vent. Do not allow a soft surface, such as bedding, clothing or a thick rug, to block airflow.
*The notebook has 3 vents. The other vents are above the keyboard and on the rear panel of the notebook. Getting Started 313 307502-003.book Page 14 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Hardware Components Labels Underside: Labels 1 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label*
2 System label*
3 Product identification label*
4 Modem approvals label (on an optional internal modem)*
5 Wireless certification label
(on an optional internal wireless device)*
Contains the Product Key number. You may need this number to update or troubleshoot the operating system. Provides regulatory information about the notebook. Contains the serial number of the notebook and a code describing the original configuration of the notebook. You will need the serial number if you call Compaq customer support. Lists the countries in which a modem has been approved for use. Lists the countries in which a wireless device has been approved for use.
*Label shapes and locations vary by region and model. 314 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 15 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Hardware Components Additional Standard Components The components included with the notebook vary by region, notebook model, and the optional hardware ordered. The following sections identify the standard external accessories and components included with most notebook models. Software Restore and Documentation CDs Your notebook includes the following CDs for restoring software and accessing product documentation:
A Compaq QuickRestore CD contains all the software included in the factory image. Restoring from the CD reformats the hard drive and returns the notebook to the factory image. To restore one or more applications without reformatting the hard drive, select Start > Software Setup, then follow the instructions on the screen. For more information about QuickRestore, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Software Guide, Software Updates and Restorations chapter. The Documentation Library CD includes the following guides:
Hardware Guide Software Guide Modem and Networking Modem Command Guidelines (Advanced Users Only) Lucent/Agere Command Set (Advanced Users Only) Conexant Command Set (Advanced Users Only) Maintenance, Shipping and Travel Regulatory and Safety Notices Safety & Comfort Guide Troubleshooting For information about using the Documentation Library CD, see Chapter 2, Beginning to Use the Notebook. Getting Started 315 307502-003.book Page 16 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Hardware Components Cables and Cord Additional Standard Components: Cables and Cord 1 Modem cable (included with select models) 2 Network cable (included with select models) 3 Power cord*
Connects a modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. A modem cable has a 6-pin, RJ-11 telephone connector at each end. Connects the notebook to an Ethernet network jack. A network cable has an 8-pin, RJ-45 network connector at each end. Connects an AC adapter to an AC electrical outlet.
*Power cords vary in appearance by region. 316 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 17 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Adapters and Battery Pack Hardware Components Additional Standard Components: Adapters and Battery Pack 1 AC adapter*
Converts AC power to DC power. 2 Country-specific modem adapter (included by region as required) Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack. 3 Japan-specific outlet adapter (Japan only) Connects the AC adapter to a 2-prong electrical outlet. 4 Battery pack (included with select models) Runs the notebook when the notebook is not connected to external power.
*AC adapters vary by region. Getting Started 317 307502-003.book Page 18 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Hardware Components 318 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM 1394 connector 39 A AC adapter AC power connector 37 connecting 12, 14 light 34 location 14, 317 AC power connector connecting 12, 14 location 37 Acrobat Reader 25, 27 adapter 317 AC 317 country-specific modem 317 Japan-specific outlet 317 See also AC adapter antivirus software 22 applications key 36 applications. See software AT commands 315 audio-out jack 310 AutoPlay 25 B battery bay inserting battery pack into 12 location 312 stabilizer 312 Index battery light 33 battery pack charging during setup 11, 15 inserting 12 location 312, 317 locking latches 12, 312 release latch 312 battery power 18 button(s) PC Card eject 311 power 35 TouchPad 32 volume 310 See also key(s); latch(es);
switch, display C cable AC adapter 12, 14 DC 37 modem 38, 316 network 38, 316 security 39 caps lock light 34 card. See memory compartment; PC Card CD(s) Compaq QuickRestore 315 displaying contents of 25 Getting Started Index1 307502-003.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Index Documentation Library CD 26 inserting 24 Certificate of Authenticity label 314 closing the notebook 35 commands, AT 315 Compaq customer support 26, 28 Compaq utilities 23 See also software compartment, memory 313 composite TV-out jack 38 Conexant Command Set (Ad-
vanced Users Only) guide 27 connector(s) 1394 39 AC power 37 external monitor 37 infrared port 37 parallel 37 USB 37 See also infrared port; jack cord, power connecting 12, 14 location 316 surge protection 18 See also cable country-specific modem adapter 317 currency formats, setting 21 customer support 26, 28 D date, setting the 21 DC cable 17, 37 display (internal) opening 13 screen resolution settings 21 display release latch 31 display switch 35 Documentation Library CD 25, 27 drive bay, hard drive 39 light (IDE) 34 optical 311 drive designations 25 E eject button, PC Card 311 electrical storm, safety issues 18 emergency shutdown procedures 18 End User License Agreement 17 external monitor connector 37 F fan, vents 33, 38, 313 Fn key 18, 36 function keys (F1, F2, etc.) 36 Index2 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM H hard drive IDE drive light 34 location 39 retaining screws 312 Hardware Guide 26 help contacting Compaq 28 Documentation Library CD 25 Hibernation 35 I IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) light 34 identifying components additional 316 display 31 left side 39 rear panel 37 right side 310 top 32 underside 312 infrared port 37 J jack audio-out 310 composite TV-out 310 microphone 310 RJ-11 38 RJ-45 38 See also connector(s);
infrared port Japan-specific modem adapter 317 Index K key(s) applications 36 Fn 36 function (F1, F2, etc.) 36 hotkeys 36 keypad 36 Microsoft logo 36 See also button(s);
latch(es); switch, display keyboard language 21 keypad 34 L label Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 314 modem approvals 314 product identification 314 system 314 wireless certification 314 LAN, internal wireless documentation 22 wireless certification label 314 wireless LAN activity light 34 language choosing during setup 17 selecting keyboard 21 latch(es) battery pack locking 312 battery pack release 312 display release 31 See also button(s); switch, display Getting Started Index3 307502-003.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Index light AC adapter 34 battery 33 caps lock 34 IDE drive 34 num lock 34 power/standby 33 wireless LAN activity 34 line-out jack 310 lock, security cable 39 locked system contacting Compaq 28 emergency shutdown procedures 18 Lucent/Agere Command Set
(Advanced Users Only) guide 27 M Maintenance, Shipping and Travel guide 26 memory compartment 313 microphone jack 310 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 314 Microsoft logo keys 36 modem approvals label 314 cable 316 Conexant Command Set
(Advanced Users Only) guide 27 country-specific adapter 317 Lucent/Agere Command Set (Advanced Users Only) guide 27 Modem and Networking guide 27 Modem Command Guide-
lines (Advanced Users Only) guide 27 RJ-11 jack 38 virus protection 22 monitor, external, connector 37 N network cable 316 Modem and Networking guide 315 RJ-45 jack 38 num lock light 34 number Product Key 314 serial 314 O opening the notebook 13 operating system installing 17 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 314 Product Key number 314 restoring 315 optical drive IDE drive light 34 inserting disc into 24 location 311 Index4 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 5 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM P parallel connector 37 passwords 29 PC Card eject button 311 slot 311 phone numbers, Compaq 28 pointing device 32 port, infrared 37 power AC power connector 37 button 35 connecting the notebook to external 14 cord 316 power/standby light 33 running the notebook on battery 15 shutting down the notebook 18 surge protection 18 turning on the notebook 16 power cord connecting 12, 14 surge protection 18 product identification label 314 Product Key number 314 R regional settings 21 Regulatory and Safety Notices guide 26 regulatory information Index modem approvals label 314 Regulatory and Safety No-
tices 315 system label 314 wireless certification label 314 release latch battery pack 312 display 31 reset (emergency shutdown procedures) 18 resolution, screen 21 RJ-11 telephone jack location 38 modem cable 316 RJ-45 network jack location 38 network cable 316 S Safety & Comfort Guide 26 screen resolution 21 security cable slot 39 screws, hard drive 312 serial number 314 service, Compaq customer 28 shutdown procedures 18 slot(s) memory 313 PC Card 311 security cable 39 software Acrobat Reader 25 antivirus protection 22 Getting Started Index5 307502-003.book Page 6 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM Index AutoPlay 25 installing optional 23 regional settings 21 restoring 315 setting up 17 Software Guide 26 speakers, internal stereo 32 Standby power/standby light 33 procedures 35 support, Compaq customer 28 switch, display 35 system label 314 T technical support contacting Compaq 28 notebook documentation 26 telephone (RJ-11) jack location 38 modem cable 316 telephone numbers, Compaq 28 1394 connector 39 time, setting 21 traveling with the notebook modem approvals label 314 regional settings 21 serial number 314 wireless certification label 314 troubleshooting contacting Compaq 28 Documentation Library CD 24 Troubleshooting guide 26 turning the notebook on/off 16, 18 U unresponsive system, emergency shutdown steps 18 USB connectors 37 utilities, Compaq displaying descriptions of 23 installing 23 restoring 315 V vents, fan 33, 38, 313 viruses, computer 22 volume buttons 310 W Web site, Compaq 28 Windows applications key 36 wireless LAN, internal documentation 22 wireless certification label 314 wireless LAN activity light 34 Worldwide Telephone Num-
bers booklet 28 Index6 Getting Started 307502-003.book Page 7 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM 307502-003.book Page 8 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM 307502-003.book Page 9 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM 307502-003.book Page 10 Tuesday, February 4, 2003 10:44 AM
1 2 3 4 5 6 | User Guide Part 1 | Users Manual | 1.43 MiB | December 08 2003 |
334004-001.book Page i Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM regulatory and safety notices Document Part Number: 334004-001 June 2003 In addition to governmental agency information, this guide provides instructions for preventing damage from electrostatic discharge. 334004-001.book Page iii Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM 2003 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. The information in this document is provided as is without warranty of any kind, and is subject to change without notice. The warranties for HP products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements accompanying such products. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. Regulatory and Safety Notices First Edition June 2003 Document Part Number: 334004-001 334004-001.book Page v Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Contents 1 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission Notice. 11 Modifications. 12 Cables . 12 Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo (United States Only) . 12 Canadian Notice . 13 Avis Canadien . 13 Japanese Notice . 13 Airline Travel Notice . 13 Power Cords Notice . 13 Battery Notice . 15 Energy Star Compliance . 15 German Ergonomics Notice. 16 Laser Safety Notices . 16 CDRH Regulations . 16 Laser Information . 17 Modem Notices . 17 Important Safety Instructions . 17 Telecommunications Device Approvals . 18 U.S. Modem Statements . 18 Canadian Modem Statements . 110 New Zealand Modem Statements . 111 Regulatory and Safety Notices v 334004-001.book Page vi Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Contents Wireless Device Notices . 112 U.S. Wireless Notice . 112 Canadian Wireless Notice . 113 European Union Notice . 113 Japanese Wireless Notice . 114 Brazilian Wireless Notice . 115 2 Electrostatic Discharge Preventing Electrostatic Discharge . 21 Handling Drives. 21 Handling Internal Components . 21 Grounding Methods . 22 vi Regulatory and Safety Notices 334004-001.book Page 1 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM 1 Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Regulatory and Safety Notices 11 334004-001.book Page 2 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Regulatory Notices Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo
(United States Only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about your product that are not related to this declaration, refer to the printed Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with your product for customer support information. Or write to:
Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to:
Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 Or call HP at 281-514-3333. To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. 12 Regulatory and Safety Notices 334004-001.book Page 3 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Regulatory Notices Canadian Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Japanese Notice Airline Travel Notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Power Cords Notice If you were not provided with a power cord for your notebook or for an external power accessory intended for use with your notebook, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country. Regulatory and Safety Notices 13 334004-001.book Page 4 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Regulatory Notices The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the products electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 5 feet (1.5 m) and 6 feet (2 m). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your HP authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Only an AC adapter provided with the notebook, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an option from HP should be used with the notebook. 14 Regulatory and Safety Notices 334004-001.book Page 5 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Regulatory Notices Battery Notice WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short the external contacts on, or dispose of a notebook battery pack in fire or water. Replace only with the HP battery pack for this notebook. N In North America, dispose of nickel metal hydride or lithium ion batteries by taking advantage of the notebook battery recycling program. This program provides you with a postage-paid battery pack mailer preaddressed to a reclamation facility where the metals are recycled. For more information, visit the recycling program Web site at https://www.orderz.com/recycle. In Europe, do not dispose of batteries with general household waste. Dispose of or recycle them by using the public collection system or returning them to HP, your authorized HP partners, or their agents. CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Energy Star Compliance This notebook is compliant with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Energy Star Computers Program 3.0. The EPA Energy Star logo does not imply endorsement by the EPA. As an Energy Star Partner, HP has determined that the product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency. Regulatory and Safety Notices 15 334004-001.book Page 6 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Regulatory Notices German Ergonomics Notice HP notebooks bearing the GS approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements when used in conjunction with docking bases, keyboards, and monitors that bear the GS approval mark. HP notebooks in a stand-alone mode are not intended for continuous use in an office environment. Laser Safety Notices All HP systems equipped with laser products comply with appropriate safety standards, including IEC 825. With specific regard to the laser, the equipment complies with laser product performance standards set by government agencies for Class 1 laser products. It does not emit hazardous light; the beam is totally enclosed during all modes of customer operation and maintenance. CDRH Regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. WARNING: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This system is classified as a Class 1 laser product. This label appears on the laser product. 16 Regulatory and Safety Notices 334004-001.book Page 7 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Regulatory Notices Laser Information Laser Type: Semiconductor GaAlAs Wave Length: 780 35 nm Divergence Angle: 53.5 1.5 Output Power: Less than 0.2mW or 10,869 Wm-2sr-1 Polarization: Circular Numerical Aperture: 0.45 0.04 Only authorized technicians trained by HP should attempt to repair this equipment. All troubleshooting and repair procedures are detailed to allow only subassembly/module level repair. Because of the complexity of the individual boards and subassemblies, no one should attempt to make repairs at the component level or to make modifications to any printed wiring board. Improper repairs can create a safety hazard. Modem Notices Important Safety Instructions WARNING: When using this device, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:
Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord in order to reduce the risk of fire. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the network
(RJ-45) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Regulatory and Safety Notices 17 334004-001.book Page 8 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Regulatory Notices Telecommunications Device Approvals The telecommunications device in your notebook is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the notebook or on the modem. Refer to the documentation included with the product to ensure the product is configured for the country in which it is located. Selecting a country other than the one in which it is located may cause your modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country. In addition, your modem may not function properly if the correct country selection is not made. If, when selecting a country, a message appears that states that the country is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country and thus should not be used. U.S. Modem Statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. 18 Regulatory and Safety Notices 334004-001.book Page 9 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Regulatory Notices The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isnt practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this HP equipment, refer to the printed Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with your notebook for information about obtaining customer support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should only perform repairs to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information. Regulatory and Safety Notices 19 334004-001.book Page 10 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Regulatory Notices If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.) In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canadian Modem Statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5.0. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. 110 Regulatory and Safety Notices 334004-001.book Page 11 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM New Zealand Modem Statements Regulatory Notices The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecoms network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecoms Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecoms Specifications:
a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. b. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. Regulatory and Safety Notices 111 334004-001.book Page 12 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Regulatory Notices Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (S0 set between 2 and 10). Voice Support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one part to the conversation is to be aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service. Wireless Device Notices In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, etc. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization to use it prior to turning it on. U.S. Wireless Notice This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 112 Regulatory and Safety Notices 334004-001.book Page 13 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Regulatory Notices The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by the Hewlett-Packard Company may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. WARNING: The radiated output power of this device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. In order to avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should not be less than 0.2 inch (0.5 cm) during normal operation. Canadian Wireless Notice Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. European Union Notice Products bearing the CE marking comply with the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC), EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) issued by the Commission of the European Community. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms (in parentheses are the equivalent international standards and regulations):
EN 55022 (CISPR 22)Electromagnetic Interference EN 55024 (IEC61000-4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11) Electromagnetic Immunity EN 61000-3-2 (IEC61000-3-2)Power Line Harmonics EN 61000-3-3 (IEC61000-3-3)Power Line Flicker Regulatory and Safety Notices 113 334004-001.book Page 15 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Regulatory Notices Brazilian Wireless Notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Regulatory and Safety Notices 115 334004-001.book Page 1 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM 2 Electrostatic Discharge A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. Before handling electrostatic-sensitive components, discharge static electricity by using one of the methods described in this chapter. Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Handling Drives Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching an exterior unpainted metal surface of a device that is connected to an electrical outlet by a grounding plug. Do not touch the connector pins on a drive or the notebook. Handling Internal Components When you are removing or installing internal components, use the following precautions:
Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Have everything needed for the installation within reach so that you do not need to leave the area after beginning the procedure. Use nonmagnetic tools. Regulatory and Safety Notices 21 334004-001.book Page 2 Thursday, April 17, 2003 1:57 PM Electrostatic Discharge Before touching an electronic component, discharge static electricity by using one of the grounding methods described later in this chapter. If you must leave the area during the procedure, remember to reground yourself before resuming the procedure. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. Grounding Methods If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the notebook, unplug it after being properly grounded and before removing a cover. Use one or both of the following grounding methods:
Touch an exterior unpainted metal surface of a device that is connected to an electrical outlet by a grounding plug. Use a wrist strap connected by a ground cord to the notebook chassis. Wrist straps are flexible grounding straps with a minimum of one megohm 10 percent resistance in the ground cords. To provide proper ground, wear the strap snugly against the skin. If you need more information about static electricity or assistance with component removal or installation, refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with your product for customer support information. 22 Regulatory and Safety Notices
1 2 3 4 5 6 | User Guide Part 2 | Users Manual | 2.51 MiB | December 08 2003 |
HP-323140-001.book Page i Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM startup and reference guide hp compaq notebook series Document Part Number: 323140-001 June 2003 Part 1: Startup The Startup part of this guide explains how to set up your notebook for the first time. Part 2: Reference The Reference part of this guide explains how to identify and use the hardware and software features on your notebook. HP-323140-001.book Page ii Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Contents 1 Startup 2 Hardware 3 Keyboard 4 Power 5 Drives and Drive Media 6 Multimedia 7 Communications 8 Hardware Options and Upgrades 9 Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities A Specifications Index HP-323140-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Part-1 Startup This Startup and Reference Guide provides information about setting up and using your notebook. To set up your notebook hardware and software for the first time, follow the procedures in this Startup part. To learn more about using your notebook, refer to the remaining Reference part of this book. To find information about a specific topic:
Refer to the chapter Contents on the first page of each chapter, or Refer to the Index. Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 11 HP-323140-001.book Page 2 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Startup Setting Up the Hardware To set up the notebook for the first time, you need the notebook, the AC adapter 1, the power cord 2, and the battery pack 3. During hardware setup, you will:
Insert the battery pack into the notebook, so the battery can begin to charge as soon as the notebook is connected to external power. Open the notebook. Connect the notebook to external power and turn on the notebook. You will then proceed to software setup. Identifying the AC adapter, the power cord, and the battery pack
(Power cords vary by region and country.) 12 Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 HP-323140-001.book Page 3 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Startup Inserting a Battery Pack To insert the battery pack into the battery bay:
1. Turn the notebook underside up on a flat surface. 2. Insert the alignment tab on the battery pack into the alignment slot on the notebook 1. 3. Tilt the battery pack downward until it snaps into place 2. Inserting a battery pack CAUTION: To ensure that the correct drivers load and to prevent file corruption or damage to components, do not remove the battery pack until the notebook has been connected to external AC power. Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 13 HP-323140-001.book Page 4 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Startup Opening the Notebook To open the notebook:
1. Place the notebook display side up on a flat surface near an electrical outlet. 2. Slide the display release latch 1 as you raise the display 2. Opening the notebook 14 Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 HP-323140-001.book Page 5 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Startup Connecting the Notebook to External Power To connect the notebook to external AC power:
1. Plug the AC adapter cable into the power connector 1. 2. Plug the power cord into the AC adapter 2, then into an electrical outlet 3. When the notebook is receiving external power, the battery light 4 turns on. Connecting the notebook to external power (Power cords and outlets vary by region and country.) Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 15 HP-323140-001.book Page 6 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Startup Charging a New Battery Pack The battery pack you inserted earlier begins to charge as soon as the notebook is connected to external power. Charge status is indicated by the battery light. The battery light is on and amber while a battery pack inserted into the notebook is charging. The battery light is on and green when a battery pack inserted into the notebook is fully charged. HP recommends that you leave the notebook connected to external power until the battery pack is fully charged and the battery light turns green. (A partially charged new battery pack can run the notebook after initial software setup is complete, but battery charge displays will not be accurate until the new battery pack has been fully charged.) Identifying the battery light 16 Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 HP-323140-001.book Page 7 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Startup Turning On the Notebook To turn on the notebook, press the power button 1. When the notebook turns on, the power/standby light 2 turns on, and you are prompted to begin software setup. Turning on the notebook If the notebook does not turn on:
Make sure that the AC adapter is securely plugged into an electrical outlet. Make sure that the outlet is providing power. (To confirm that the outlet is providing power, plug another device into the outlet.) If you have installed a battery pack, make sure that the battery pack is firmly seated. Refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet (English only) included with the notebook to contact an HP Customer Care Center. Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 17 HP-323140-001.book Page 8 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Startup Setting Up the Software CAUTION: To prevent file corruption and ensure that the correct drivers are installed, install software only when the notebook is connected to external power through the AC adapter. During the installation:
Do not unplug the notebook from external power. Do not shut down the notebook or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. Installing Basic Software When the notebook is connected to external power and turned on for the first time, a prompt to set up the operating system and other basic software is displayed on the screen. Before responding to the prompt and proceeding through the on-screen instructions, read the following caution and other installation information. After beginning the software setup, you must complete the entire process without interruption. Setup time varies. If you are prompted to select a language, choose carefully. On some models, the languages that you do not choose are deleted from the system and cannot be restored during the installation. Regional settings and most other preferences that you may select as you set up the basic software can be selected or changed later, after the operating system is installed. When you are prompted to accept the End User License Agreement, you must choose Accept to continue the software setup. During setup, it is normal for some notebook models to pause occasionally for up to 2 minutes and to restart several times. These pauses and restarts occur only during initial software setup. They will not occur during standard Windows startups. 18 Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 HP-323140-001.book Page 9 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Startup Installing Optional Software Step-by-step instructions for installing and using many of the applications and utilities included with the notebook are provided later in this guide. If you prefer to install optional software now, the following information may be helpful. To install an application or a utility from a CD, refer to the instructions included with the CD. If printed instructions are not included in the CD package, they may be displayed on the screen when the CD is inserted. To view or install preloaded utilities or applications, select Start >
All Programs > Software Setup. Then:
To display the descriptions and space requirements of a preloaded item without installing it, select the Next button, then select an item. After viewing the information that is displayed, select the Cancel button. To install a preloaded item, select the check box for the item, select the Next button, then follow the instructions on the screen. Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 19 HP-323140-001.book Page 10 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Startup Setting Regional and Display Preferences Keyboard language and other regional preferences, such as time, date, and currency format, are set in the Regional Options window of the operating system. To access the Regional Options window, select Start > Control Panel > Date, Time, Language and Regional Options icon. Screen appearance settings are accessed from the operating system Appearance and Themes window. To access the Appearance and Themes window, select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes icon. To access the settings that control the size of the items displayed on the screen, select the Change Resolution task. Turning Off the Notebook Turn off the notebook by using the Windows shutdown procedure: Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If the notebook does not respond, try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:
If the notebook is running Microsoft Windows XP Professional: press ctrl+alt+delete. Select the Shut Down button, then select Shut down from the drop down list. Press and hold down the power button for at least 4 seconds. Unplug the notebook from external power and remove the battery pack. For instructions see Replacing a Battery Pack in Chapter 4. 110 Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 HP-323140-001.book Page 11 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Startup Protecting the Notebook from Power Surges To protect the notebook from the power surges that may be caused by an uncertain power supply or an electrical storm:
Plug the notebook power cord into an optional, high-quality surge protector. Surge protectors are available from most computer or electronics retailers. Provide surge protection on the cable that connects a modem to the telephone line. During an electrical storm, run the notebook on battery power or shut down the notebook and disconnect the power cord. Protecting the Notebook Against Viruses When you use the notebook for email, network, or Internet access, you expose the notebook to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, your applications, or your utilities or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair damage they have caused. To provide protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be updated. The Norton AntiVirus 2003 software installed on your notebook provides 60 days of free virus updates. For Norton AntiVirus 2003 instructions and more information about virus updates, refer to the Help file within the application or select Start > Help and Support. Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 111 HP-323140-001.book Page 12 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Startup Using the Notebook Safely This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. For more safety and regulatory information, as well as instructions for protecting the notebook against electrostatic discharge, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Regulatory and Safety Notices guide. The Documentation Library CD is included with your notebook. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment:
Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the product by unplugging the power cord from the electrical outlet. If provided with a three-conductor power cord with a three-pin attachment plug, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety &
Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo, on the hard drive, or on the Documentation Library CD that is included with the product. WARNING: This notebook is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the notebook to feel warm or hot when used continuously. To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or use the notebook on your lap for extended periods. The notebook complies with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment
(IEC 60950). 112 Startup and Reference GuidePart 1 HP-323140-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Part 2 Reference Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 2 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM 2 Hardware Contents Display . 22 Top . 23 TouchPad . 23 Keys and Antenna . 24 Power Controls . 25 Lights . 26 Audio Buttons and Speakers . 27 Front Panel . 28 Rear Panel . 29 Connectors and Jacks. 29 Vent . 210 Left Side . 211 Right Side. 212 Underside . 213 Bays and Memory Compartment. 213 Docking Connector and Vents. 214 Labels. 215 Additional Standard Components . 216 Cables and Cord. 216 Adapters and Battery Pack . 217 Restoration and Documentation CDs . 218 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 21 HP-323140-001.book Page 2 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Display Display Display release latch Opens the notebook. 22 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 3 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Top TouchPad Top: TouchPad 1 TouchPad on/off button Enables/disables the TouchPad. 2 TouchPad*
Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. 3 TouchPad light On: TouchPad is enabled. 4 TouchPad scroll zones (2)*
Scroll upward or downward. 5 Left and right TouchPad buttons*
Function like the left and right buttons on an external mouse.
*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the functions of TouchPad features, see Setting TouchPad Preferences in Chapter 3. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 23 HP-323140-001.book Page 4 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Keys and Antenna Top: Keys and Antenna 1 Fn key 2 Function keys (12) 3 Keypad keys (15) 4 Applications key 5 Antenna (available on select models and not visible from outside the notebook)*
Combines with other keys to perform system tasks. For example, pressing Fn+F7 increases screen brightness. Perform system and application tasks. When combined with the Fn key, the function keys F1 and F3 through F12 perform additional tasks as hotkeys. Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Sends and receives wireless device signals. 6 Microsoft logo key Displays the Windows Start menu.
*The notebook has 2 antennas. The second is on the right side of the notebook. For optimal transmissions, keep the areas immediately over the antennas free from obstructions. 24 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 5 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Controls Hardware Top: Power Controls 1 Power button* When the notebook is:
Off, press to turn on the notebook. On, briefly press to initiate Hibernation. In Standby, briefly press to resume from Standby. In Hibernation, briefly press to restore from Hibernation. If the system has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold for at least 4 seconds to turn off the notebook. If the notebook is closed while on, turns off the display. If the notebook is opened while in Standby, turns on the notebook (resumes from Standby). 2 Display switch*
*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the function of the power button or display switch, see Setting Power Control Preferences in Chapter 4. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 25 HP-323140-001.book Page 6 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Lights Top: Lights 1 Num lock light On: Num lock or the internal keypad is on. 2 Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on. 3 Mute light On: Volume is muted. 4 Wireless device light
(available on select models) 5 Battery light On: An optional internal wireless device is turned on. On: The notebook is receiving adequate external power. On amber: A battery pack is charging. On green: A battery pack is fully charged. Flashing: A battery pack is malfunctioning and may need to be replaced. 6 IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) drive light On: The internal hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. 7 Power/standby light On: Notebook is turned on. Flashing: Notebook is in Standby. 26 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 7 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Audio Buttons and Speakers Hardware Top: Audio Buttons and Speakers 1 Increase volume button Increases system volume. 2 Decrease volume button Decreases system volume. 3 Mute button Mutes or restores volume. 4 Stereo speakers (2) Produce stereo sound. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 27 HP-323140-001.book Page 8 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Front Panel Front Panel 1 SD Card light 2 SD (Secure Digital) Card slot 3 Microphone jack 4 Audio-out jack 5 Wireless device button
(available on select models) On: An SD Card or MMC is being accessed. Supports SD Cards and MMCs (multimedia cards). Connects an optional monaural or stereo microphone. Connects optional headphones or powered stereo speakers. Also connects the audio function of an audio/video device such as a television or VCR. Turns an optional internal wireless device on or off. 28 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 9 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Rear Panel Connectors and Jacks Hardware Rear Panel: Connectors and Jacks 1 External monitor connector 2 S-Video jack 3 USB connectors (3) 4 RJ-45 network jack 5 RJ-11 telephone jack Connects an optional VGA external monitor or projector. Connects an optional S-Video device, such as a television, VCR, camcorder, projector, or video capture card. Connect optional 2.0-compliant USB devices. Connects an Ethernet network cable.
(An Ethernet network cable is included with select models.) Connects a modem cable. (A modem cable is included with select models.) 6 Parallel connector (available on select models) Connects an optional parallel device such as a printer. 7 1394 connector Connects an optional 1394 device such as a camcorder. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 29 HP-323140-001.book Page 10 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Vent Rear Panel: Vent Exhaust vent*
Provides airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Do not allow a hard surface, such as a printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or thick rugs or clothing, to block airflow.
*The notebook has 3 vents. The other vents are on the underside of the notebook. 210 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 11 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Left Side Hardware Left Side 1 PC Card slot 2 PC Card eject button Supports an optional Type I or Type II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card. Ejects an optional PC Card from the PC Card slot. 3 Optical drive*
Supports an optical disc.
*The type of optical drive, for example a CD, DVD, or combination CD/DVD drive, varies by model. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 211 HP-323140-001.book Page 12 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Right Side Right Side 1 Antenna (available on select models and not visible from outside the notebook)*
2 Infrared port Sends and receives wireless device signals. Provides wireless communication between the notebook and an optional IrDA-compliant device. 3 Power connector Connects an AC adapter cable. 4 Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the notebook.
*The notebook has 2 antennas. The second is on the right side of the notebook. For optimal transmissions, keep the areas immediately over the antennas free from obstructions. 212 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 13 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Underside Bays and Memory Compartment Underside: Bays and Memory Compartment 1 Battery bay Holds a battery pack. 2 Battery pack release latch 3 Memory compartment Releases a battery pack from the battery bay. Contains 1 memory slot for an optional 128-MB, 256-MB, 512-MB, or 1024-MB memory module. As shipped, the memory slot may be filled with a replaceable memory module or vacant, depending on the notebook model. 4 Hard drive bay Holds the internal hard drive. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 213 HP-323140-001.book Page 14 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Docking Connector and Vents Underside: Docking Connector and Vent 1 Docking connector*
Connects the notebook to an optional port replicator. 2 Vents (3) Allow airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, use the notebook only on hard surfaces which cannot obstruct the vents. Do not allow a soft surface, such as bedding, clothing or a thick rug, to block airflow.
*As shipped, the docking connector is not visible. The docking connector is beneath the docking connector cover, which protects the connector when the connector is not in use. 214 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 15 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Labels The labels affixed to the notebook and some notebook components provide information you may need when troubleshooting system problems or traveling internationally with the notebook. The Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label contains the Product Key number. You may need this number to update or troubleshoot the operating system. The system label provides regulatory information about the notebook. The product identification label contains the serial number of the notebook and a code describing the original configuration of the notebook. You will need the notebook serial number if you call customer support. The modem approvals label, which is affixed to an optional internal modem, provides regulatory information. Wireless certification labels, which are specific to various types of optional wireless devices, are affixed to the notebook and provide regulatory information. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 215 HP-323140-001.book Page 16 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Additional Standard Components The components included with the notebook vary by region, country, notebook model, and the optional hardware ordered. The following sections identify the standard external accessories and components included with most notebook models. Cables and Cord Additional Standard Components: Cables and Cord 1 Modem cable
(included with select models) 2 Network cable
(included with select models) 3 Power cord*
Connects a modem to an RJ-11 telephone jack or to a country-specific modem adapter. A modem cable has a 6-pin, RJ-11 telephone connector at each end. Connects the notebook to an Ethernet network jack. A network cable has an 8-pin, RJ-45 network connector at each end. Connects an AC adapter to an AC electrical outlet.
*Power cords vary in appearance by region and country. 216 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 17 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Adapters and Battery Pack Hardware Additional Standard Components: Adapters and Battery Pack 1 AC adapter Converts AC power to DC power. 2 Country-specific modem adapter (included by region as required) Adapts the modem cable to a non-RJ-11 telephone jack. 3 Japan-specific outlet adapter
(Japan only) Connects the AC adapter to a 2-prong electrical outlet. 4 Battery pack Runs the notebook when the notebook is not connected to external power. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 217 HP-323140-001.book Page 18 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Restoration and Documentation CDs CDs for repairing or reinstalling software and for obtaining supplementary information about the notebook are included with the notebook. For information about restoring, repairing, or reinstalling software, refer to Chapter 9, Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities. For supplementary information about the notebook, refer to the Documentation Library CD. The Documentation Library CD included with all models includes the following guides. Additional guidesfor example, instruction manuals for using an optional wireless deviceare included with select models. For Information About These Topics Select This Guide Caring for the notebook and drives Preparing the notebook for transport Traveling with the notebook internationally Solving notebook problems yourself Getting help Governmental and safety information Protecting the notebook from static electricity Maintenance, Shipping and Travel Troubleshooting Regulatory and Safety Notices Ergonomic and safety information Safety & Comfort Guide General instructions for using modem AT commands Modem Command Guidelines (Advanced UsersOnly) AT commands supported by a Lucent/Agere modem. (An optional internal modem supports the Lucent/Agere command set.) Lucent/Agere CommandSet
(Advanced UsersOnly)*
*Available in English only. 218 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM 3 Keyboard Contents TouchPad . 32 Identifying TouchPad Components . 32 Using the TouchPad. 33 Setting TouchPad Preferences . 33 Hotkeys . 34 Identifying Hotkeys . 34 Hotkey Quick Reference . 35 Hotkey Procedures. 35 Hotkey Commands . 36 Keypad . 38 Turning the Keypad On and Off . 39 Switching the Functions of Keypad Keys . 39 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 31 HP-323140-001.book Page 2 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Keyboard TouchPad Identifying TouchPad Components The TouchPad includes the following components:
1 TouchPad 4 TouchPad on/off button 2 Left and right TouchPad buttons 5 TouchPad light 3 TouchPad scroll zones (2) Identifying TouchPad components 32 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 3 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Keyboard Using the TouchPad The TouchPad provides the navigation, selection, and scroll functions of an optional external mouse. To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want to move the pointer. If the pointer continues to move after you lift your finger from the TouchPad surface, wait a few seconds and the pointer will stop moving. To execute the click functions of the left or right button on an external mouse, press the left or right TouchPad button. To scroll upward, press the icon in the upward scroll zone. To scroll downward, press the icon in the downward scroll zone. To enable or disable the TouchPad, press the TouchPad button. When the TouchPad is enabled, the TouchPad light is on. The notebook turns on with the TouchPad enabled. Users who work with keystrokes rather than mouse actions may prefer to disable the TouchPad to prevent accidental TouchPad activity. Setting TouchPad Preferences Pointer speed and shape, click speed, mouse trails, and other pointing device preferences are set in the operating system Mouse Properties window. To access Mouse Properties, select Start >
Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware icon > Mouse icon. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 33 HP-323140-001.book Page 4 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Keyboard Hotkeys Identifying Hotkeys Hotkeys are preset combinations of the Fn key 1 and one of the function keys 2. The icons on the function keys F1 and F3 through F12 represent the hotkey functions available on the notebook. Identifying hotkeys 34 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 5 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Keyboard Hotkey Quick Reference The following table identifies the default hotkey functions. For information about changing the function of the Fn+F5 hotkeys, see the Setting Power Control Preferences section in Chapter 4. Default Function Hotkeys Open Help and Support window. Open Microsoft Internet Explorer. Switch display and image. Initiate Standby. Initiate QuickLock. Decrease display brightness. Increase display brightness. Play, pause, or resume an audio CD or DVD. Stop an audio CD or DVD. Play the previous track or chapter on an audio CD or DVD. Play the next track on an audio CD or DVD. Hotkey Procedures Fn+F1 Fn+F3 Fn+F4 Fn+F5 Fn+F6 Fn+F7 Fn+F8 Fn+F9 Fn+F10 Fn+F11 Fn+F12 To use a hotkeys command on the notebook keyboard, use either of the following procedures:
Briefly press the Fn key, then briefly press the second key of the hotkeys command. Press and hold down the Fn key, briefly press the second key of the hotkeys command, then release both keys at the same time. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 35 HP-323140-001.book Page 6 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Keyboard Hotkey Commands Open Help and Support Window (Fn+F1) The Fn+F1 hotkeys open the Help and Support window. From the Help and Support window you can access general information about your notebook, links to software updates and online technical support specialists, and other support features. For more information about the Help and Support window, see the Using the Help and Support Window section in Chapter 9, Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities. Open Internet Explorer (Fn+F3) The Fn+F3 hotkeys open Internet Explorer. After you have set up your Internet or network services and your Internet Explorer home page, you can use the Fn+F3 hotkeys for quick access to your home page and the Internet. Switch Image (Fn+F4) The Fn+F4 hotkeys switch the image among display devices connected to the external monitor connector or the S-Video jack on the notebook. For example, if an external monitor is connected to the notebook, pressing the Fn+F4 hotkeys switches the image among the notebook display, the external monitor display, and a simultaneous display on both the notebook and the monitor. Initiate Standby (Fn+F5) The Fn+F5 hotkeys are set by default to initiate Standby. Standby can be initiated only while the notebook is on. If the notebook is in Hibernation, you must restore from Hibernation before you can initiate Standby. 36 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 7 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Keyboard To restore from Hibernation or resume from Standby, briefly press the power button. For more information about using Standby and Hibernation, refer to Chapter 4, Power. For information about changing the function of the Fn+F5 hotkeys, refer in Chapter 4 to the Setting Power Control Preferences section. Initiate QuickLock (Fn+F6) The Fn+F6 hotkeys initiate the operating system QuickLock security feature. The QuickLock feature disables the keyboard and displays the log on screen. QuickLock does not disable the TouchPad. Before you can use the QuickLock feature, you must set a Windows system password. For instructions, refer to your operating system documentation. After you have set a Windows system password:
To initiate QuickLock, press Fn+F6. To exit QuickLock, enter your Windows system password. Decrease Brightness (Fn+F7) The Fn+F7 hotkeys decrease notebook screen brightness. Increase Brightness (Fn+F8) The Fn+F8 hotkeys increase notebook screen brightness. Play, Pause, or Resume an Audio CD or DVD (Fn+F9) The Fn+F9 hotkeys function only when an audio CD or DVD is inserted. If the audio CD or DVD is Not playing, press the Fn+F9 hotkeys to begin or resume the play. Playing, press the Fn+F9 hotkeys to pause the play. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 37 HP-323140-001.book Page 8 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Keyboard Stop an Audio CD or DVD (Fn+F10) The Fn+F10 hotkeys stop the play of an audio CD or DVD that is playing. Play Previous Track of an Audio CD or DVD (Fn+F11) The Fn+F11 hotkeys play the previously played track of an audio CD or DVD that is playing. Play Next Track of an Audio CD or DVD (Fn+F12) The Fn+F12 hotkeys play the next track of an audio CD or DVD that is playing. Keypad The keypad consists of 15 keys that can be used like the keys on an external keypad. When the keypad is turned on, each keypad key performs the functions indicated by the icon in the upper right corner of the key. Identifying the keypad keys 38 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 9 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Keyboard Turning the Keypad On and Off When the keypad is off, press Fn+num lk 1 to turn the keypad on. When the keypad is on, press Fn+num lk to turn the keypad off. The num lock light 2 turns on when the keypad is on. Identifying the Fn and num lk keys and the num lock light Switching the Functions of Keypad Keys You can temporarily switch the functions of a keypad key between its standard function and its keypad function. To use a key on the keypad as a keypad key while the keypad is turned off, press and hold Fn while pressing the key. To use a key on the keypad as a standard key while the keypad is turned on:
Press and hold Fn to type with the key in lowercase. Press and hold Fn+shift to type with the key in uppercase. Releasing the Fn key returns a keypad key to its set function. For example, a keypad key returns to its keypad function if the keypad is turned on or to its standard function if the keypad is turned off. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 39 HP-323140-001.book Page 10 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Keyboard 310 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM 4 Power Contents Understanding Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown . 42 Standby . 42 Hibernation . 42 Shutdown . 43 Choosing Standby, Hibernation or Shutdown . 44 Using Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown Procedures . 45 Identifying Power Controls and Indicators . 45 Turning the Notebook or Display On or Off . 46 Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures . 46 Initiating or Resuming from Standby . 47 Initiating or Restoring from Hibernation. 48 Setting Power Control Preferences . 49 Using Battery Power . 410 Identifying the Battery and Power/Standby Lights . 410 Switching Between Battery and External Power. 411 Charging a Battery Pack . 411 Monitoring the Charge in a Battery Pack . 412 Managing Low-Battery Conditions . 413 Calibrating a Battery Pack. 414 Storing a Battery Pack . 416 Battery Conservation Settings and Procedures . 417 Replacing a Battery Pack . 418 Recycling or Disposing of a Used Battery Pack . 419 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 41 HP-323140-001.book Page 2 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Understanding Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown This section describes Standby, Hibernation, and shutdown and explains when to implement them. Standby, Hibernation, and shutdown procedures are provided later in the chapter. Standby and Hibernation are energy-saving features that can be initiated by you or by the system. Standby Standby reduces power to system components that are not in use. When Standby is initiated, your work is saved in random access memory (RAM) and the screen is cleared. Saving your work before initiating Standby is not usually necessary, but is a recommended precaution. When the notebook is in Standby, the power/standby light flashes. When you resume from Standby, your work returns to the screen where you left off. Hibernation Hibernation saves system memory to the hard drive, takes a snapshot of the notebook image, then shuts down the notebook. When you resume from Hibernation, your work returns to the screen exactly as you left it. The following information may be useful as you manage Hibernation:
Saving your work before initiating Hibernation is not usually necessary, but is a recommended precaution. 42 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 3 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power To determine whether the notebook is in Hibernation or turned off, press the power button:
If the notebook is in Hibernation, your work returns to the screen. If the notebook is off, Windows loads. Hibernation is enabled by default, but can be disabled. To prevent loss of work during a critical low-battery condition, disable Hibernation only during a battery pack calibration. To verify that Hibernation is enabled, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options icon > Hibernate tab. If Hibernation is enabled, the Enable Hibernation check box is selected. CAUTION: If the configuration of the notebook system is changed during Hibernation, it may not be possible to resume from Hibernation. When the notebook is in Hibernation:
Do not add or remove a memory module. Do not connect or disconnect an external device. Do not insert or remove a CD, DVD, PC Card, SD Card, or MMC. Shutdown Shutdown procedures turn off the notebook. Whether to leave a battery pack in the notebook or in storage depends on how you work:
Leaving the battery pack in the notebook enables the battery pack to charge whenever the notebook is connected to external power and also protects your work during a power outage. A battery pack in the notebook discharges more quickly, even when the notebook is turned off, than a battery pack that has been removed from the notebook and stored in a cool, dry location. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 43 HP-323140-001.book Page 4 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Choosing Standby, Hibernation or Shutdown If you plan to resume shortly: Initiate Standby for shorter times and Hibernation for longer times or power conservation. The amount of time a battery pack can support Standby or Hibernation or hold a charge varies by notebook configuration and the condition of the battery pack. Initiating Standby clears the screen, uses less power than leaving the notebook on, and your work returns quickly to the screen when you resume from Standby. A fully charged new battery pack can typically support Standby for up to 48 hours. Initiating Hibernation clears the screen and uses much less power than Standby. Returning to work saved in Hibernation takes longer than returning to work saved in Standby, but is faster than returning to your place manually after restarting the notebook. A fully charged new battery pack can typically support Hibernation for several weeks. If you plan to resume within 2 weeks: Shut down the notebook. If possible, connect the notebook to external power to keep an inserted battery pack fully charged. If the notebook will be disconnected from external power for more than 2 weeks: To extend the life of an inserted battery pack, shut down the notebook. Remove the battery pack and store it in a cool, dry location. If an external power supply is uncertain, for example, because of an electrical storm, save your work, then initiate Hibernation or shut down the notebook. 44 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 5 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Using Standby, Hibernation and Shutdown Procedures This section explains the default Standby, Hibernation, and shutdown procedures and includes information about turning the display on or off. Identifying Power Controls and Indicators Standby, Hibernation, shutdown, and display procedures use the following controls and indicators:
1 Power button 3 Fn+F5 hotkeys (to initiate Standby) 2 Display switch 4 Power/standby light Identifying Standby, Hibernation, shutdown, and display controls and indicators Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 45 HP-323140-001.book Page 6 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Turning the Notebook or Display On or Off Procedure Results Task Turn on the notebook. Press the power button. Pressing the power button turns on the notebook from Standby, Hibernation, or shutdown. Shut down the notebook.*
Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. Turn off the display when the notebook is closed. Close the notebook. Power/standby light turns on. Operating system loads. Power/standby light turns off. Operating system shuts down. Notebook turns off. When the notebook is closed, the display presses the display switch, which then turns off the display.
*If the system is unresponsive, and you are unable to shut down the notebook with this procedure, see Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures next in this section. Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures If the notebook does not respond to the Windows shutdown procedure (Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off), try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:
If the notebook is running Windows XP Professional: Press ctrl+alt+delete. Select the Shut Down button, then select Shut down from the drop down list. Press and hold down the power button for at least 4 seconds. Unplug the notebook from external power and remove the battery pack. For battery pack removal instructions see the Replacing a Battery Pack section, later in this chapter. 46 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 | User Guide Part 3 | Users Manual | 2.31 MiB | December 08 2003 |
HP-323140-001.book Page 6 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Turning the Notebook or Display On or Off Procedure Results Task Turn on the notebook. Press the power button. Pressing the power button turns on the notebook from Standby, Hibernation, or shutdown. Shut down the notebook.*
Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. Turn off the display when the notebook is closed. Close the notebook. Power/standby light turns on. Operating system loads. Power/standby light turns off. Operating system shuts down. Notebook turns off. When the notebook is closed, the display presses the display switch, which then turns off the display.
*If the system is unresponsive, and you are unable to shut down the notebook with this procedure, see Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures next in this section. Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures If the notebook does not respond to the Windows shutdown procedure (Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off), try the following emergency shutdown procedures in the sequence provided:
If the notebook is running Windows XP Professional: Press ctrl+alt+delete. Select the Shut Down button, then select Shut down from the drop down list. Press and hold down the power button for at least 4 seconds. Unplug the notebook from external power and remove the battery pack. For battery pack removal instructions see the Replacing a Battery Pack section, later in this chapter. 46 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 7 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Initiating or Resuming from Standby Task Procedure Result User-initiated Standby System-initiated Standby Resume from user-initiated or system-initiated Standby. With the notebook on, use either of the following procedures:
Press the Fn+F5 hotkeys. Select Start > Turn off Computer > Stand by. If the notebook is running on external power, the system does not initiate Standby. If the notebook is running on battery power, the system initiates Standby after 10 minutes of notebook inactivity. Briefly press the power button, or move (or click any button on) an optional external USB mouse. If the display was closed while the notebook was in Standby, open the display. Power/standby light flashes. Screen clears. Power/standby light flashes. Screen clears. Power/standby light turns on. Your work returns to the screen. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 47 HP-323140-001.book Page 8 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Initiating or Restoring from Hibernation Task Procedure Result User-initiated Hibernation System-initiated Hibernation Restore from user-initiated or system-initiated Hibernation. With the notebook on, use either of the following procedures:
Briefly press the power button. Select Start > Shut Down >
Hibernate. (If the Hibernate option is not displayed, press and hold shift.) If the notebook is in Standby, you must resume from Standby before you can initiate Hibernation. If the notebook is running on external power, the system does not initiate Hibernation. If the notebook is running on battery power, the system initiates Hibernation:
After 30 minutes of notebook inactivity, or When an inserted battery pack reaches a critical low-battery condition
(1 percent of a full charge remaining). Press the power button. If the system initiated Hibernation because of a critical low-battery condition, connect external power or insert a charged battery pack before you press the power button. Power/standby light turns off. Screen clears. Power/standby light turns off. Screen clears. Power/standby light turns on. Your work returns to the screen. 48 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 9 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Setting Power Control Preferences By default, when the notebook is on:
Briefly pressing the power button initiates Hibernation. Pressing the Fn+F5 hotkeys, called the sleep button in the operating system, initiates Standby. The display switch turns off the display. The display switch is activated by closing the display. (At default and all custom settings, the display switch also turns on the notebook if the display is opened while the notebook is in Standby.) To change the function of the power button, the Fn+F5 hotkeys, or the display switch:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Advanced tab. To change the power button function, select a function from the drop-down list for When I Press The Power Button On My Computer. To change the function of the Fn+F5 hotkeys, select a function from the drop-down list for When I Press The Sleep Button On My Computer. To change the display switch function, select a function from the drop-down list for When I Close The Lid Of My Portable Computer. 2. Select the OK button. The Hibernate function is available in the power button, sleep button, and display switch drop-down lists only if Hibernation is enabled. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 49 HP-323140-001.book Page 10 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Using Battery Power Identifying the Battery and Power/Standby Lights Battery pack procedures refer to the:
1 Power/standby light 2 Battery light Identifying the battery and power/standby lights 410 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 11 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Switching Between Battery and External Power The notebook switches between external power and battery power according to the availability of external power. To conserve the charge in an inserted battery pack, the notebook runs on external power whenever external power is available. External power can be supplied from an electrical outlet through an AC adapter or an optional DC cable. If the notebook contains a charged battery pack and is running on external power, the notebook switches to battery power only if the AC adapter or DC cable is disconnected from the notebook. The Power Meter icon in the system tray changes shape whenever the power source changes between battery power and external power. Charging a Battery Pack The battery pack charges whenever the notebook is connected to external power through an AC adapter or an optional DC cable. The battery pack charges whether the notebook is turned off or turned on, but charges most quickly when the notebook is turned off. When the notebook is turned on, charging times are longer and vary with system activity. The battery light displays charge status:
On and amber: the battery pack is charging. On and green: the battery pack is fully charged. Flashing: the battery pack is malfunctioning and may need to be replaced. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 411 HP-323140-001.book Page 12 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Monitoring the Charge in a Battery Pack Obtaining Accurate Charge Information To increase the accuracy of all battery charge displays:
Allow the battery pack to discharge to less than 10 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. Charge the battery pack fully. Even a new battery pack can display charge information inaccurately if it has not been fully charged. If a battery pack has not been used for one month or more, the battery pack may need to be calibrated. Displaying Charge Information To display battery charge information on the screen, use the operating system Power Meter feature. To access Power Meter displays, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Power Meter tab. Power Meter displays battery status in both percent and time:
The percent indicates the amount of charge remaining in the battery pack. The time indicates the approximate running time remaining on the battery pack if the battery pack continues to provide power at the current level. For example, the time remaining will decrease if you start playing a DVD and will increase if you stop playing a DVD. 412 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 13 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Managing Low-Battery Conditions The information in this section describes default alerts and system responses. Identifying Low-Battery Conditions When the battery pack is the only power source for the notebook and drops to 10 percent of a full charge, the notebook has reached a low-battery condition. A text warning message appears on the screen. If a low-battery condition is not resolved and the amount of charge remaining in the battery pack continues to drop, the notebook eventually enters a critical low-battery condition. Then, if the notebook is on or in Standby:
If Hibernation is enabled, the system initiates Hibernation. Unsaved work may be lost. If Hibernation is disabled, the notebook remains briefly in Standby, then shuts down. The power/standby light turns off, and the notebook cannot save system memory to the hard drive. Resolving Low-Battery Conditions CAUTION: If the notebook has reached a critical low-battery condition and has begun to initiate Hibernation, do not restore power until Hibernation is complete. When Hibernation is complete, the power/standby light turns off. If external power is available, connect the notebook to the external power source. If a charged battery pack is available, shut down the notebook or initiate Hibernation. Insert a charged battery pack, then turn on the notebook. If no power source is available, save your work. Then initiate Hibernation or shut down the notebook. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 413 HP-323140-001.book Page 14 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Calibrating a Battery Pack When to Calibrate Even if a battery pack is heavily used, it should not be necessary to calibrate it more than once a month. It is not necessary to calibrate a new battery pack before first use. Calibrate the battery pack under the following conditions:
When battery charge displays seem inaccurate. When you observe a significant change in battery run time. When the battery pack has not been used for one month or more. How to Calibrate To calibrate a battery pack, you must fully charge, fully discharge, then fully recharge the battery pack. Charging the Battery Pack Charge the battery pack while the notebook is in use. To charge the battery pack:
1. Insert the battery pack into the notebook. For instructions, see Replacing a Battery Pack later in this chapter. 2. Connect the notebook to external power. (The battery light is on and amber as the battery pack charges.) 3. Leave the notebook connected to external power until the battery pack is fully charged. (The battery light turns green.) Discharging the Battery Pack Before you begin the full discharge, disable Hibernation. To disable Hibernation, select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options > Hibernate tab. Then clear the Enable Hibernation check box. 414 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 15 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power If you use the notebook occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from your system during the discharge process:
The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically while the notebook is idle. System-initiated Standby will not occur. CAUTION: If you plan to leave the notebook unattended during discharge, save your work before starting the discharge procedure. To fully discharge the battery pack:
1. Select the power icon on the taskbar or select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Power Schemes tab. 2. Record all settings in the Plugged In column and all settings in the Running On Batteries column, so you can reset them after calibration. 3. Use the drop-down lists to set each item in both columns to Never. 4. Select the OK button. 5. Disconnect the notebook from the external power source, but do not turn off the notebook. 6. Run the notebook on battery power until the battery pack is fully discharged. When the battery pack is fully discharged, the battery light turns off and the notebook shuts down. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 415 HP-323140-001.book Page 16 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Recharging the Battery Pack 1. Connect the notebook to external power and keep the notebook connected until the battery pack is fully recharged and the battery light turns green. You can use the notebook while the battery pack is recharging, but the battery pack will charge faster if the notebook is turned off. 2. Select the Power icon on the taskbar or select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Power Schemes tab. 3. Reenter the settings you recorded for the items in the Plugged In column and the Running on Batteries column. 4. Select the OK button. CAUTION: After calibrating the battery pack, reenable Hibernation:
select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options > Hibernate tab, then select the Enable Hibernation check box. Storing a Battery Pack If the notebook will be unused and unplugged for more than 2 weeks, remove and store the battery pack. CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery pack, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. High temperatures, which may be present in parked cars or some workplaces, accelerate the self-discharge rate of a stored battery pack. To prolong the charge of a stored battery pack, place it in a location that is cool and dry. To maintain the accuracy of battery charge displays, calibrate a battery pack that has been stored for one month or more before using it. 416 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 17 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Battery Conservation Settings and Procedures Power Using the following battery conservation settings and procedures extends the run time of a battery pack. Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect from the notebook any external devices that use power from the notebook. Battery run time is not affected by external devices that are plugged into an external power source. Stop or remove a PC Card you are not using. Disable or remove an SD (Secure Digital) Card or MMC
(multimedia card) you are not using. Lower screen brightness. Screen brightness can be lowered by pressing the Fn+F7 hotkeys. Lower system volume. Volume can be lowered with the decrease volume button. Turn off a device connected to the S-Video connector. A device connected to the S-Video connector can be turned off by using the Fn+F4 hotkeys to switch the image from the S-Video device to the notebook display. If you leave your work, initiate Standby or Hibernation or shut down the notebook. Select a short wait time, 5 minutes or less, for the monitor timeout. To change monitor timeout settings, select Start >
Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Power Meter tab. Select a short wait time from the Turn Off Monitor drop-down list, then select OK. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 417 HP-323140-001.book Page 18 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power Replacing a Battery Pack CAUTION: To prevent loss of work when removing a battery pack that is the only power source, initiate Hibernation or turn off the notebook before removing the battery pack. To replace the battery pack:
1. Turn the notebook underside up. To remove a battery pack, slide the battery release latch 1. (The battery pack tilts upward.) Then pull the battery pack out of the battery bay 2. Removing a battery pack 418 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 19 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power To insert a battery pack, insert the alignment tab on the battery pack into the alignment slot on the notebook 1, then tilt the battery pack downward until it snaps into place 2. Inserting a battery pack 2. To restore from Hibernation or to turn on the notebook, press the power button. Recycling or Disposing of a Used Battery Pack For information about recycling or disposing of a used battery pack, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Regulatory and Safety Notices guide, Battery Notice section. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 419 HP-323140-001.book Page 20 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Power 420 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM 5 Drives and Drive Media Contents Understanding Drive and Drive Media Terms. 52 Caring for Drives and Drive Media . 53 Adding a Drive to the System . 54 Using the IDE Drive Light. 54 Inserting or Removing a Disc . 55 Inserting a Disc . 55 Removing a Disc (With Power). 56 Removing a Disc (Without Power) . 57 Playing a Disc . 58 Displaying Media Contents . 58 Protecting Playback . 59 Observing the Copyright Warning . 59 Setting the Boot Order . 510 Replacing the Internal Hard Drive . 510 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 51 HP-323140-001.book Page 2 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Drives and Drive Media Understanding Drive and Drive Media Terms Hard drives are for the permanent storage of data files and of software such as system files, applications, and drivers. A hard drive is sometimes called a hard disk drive. Diskette drives support diskettes, which are used to store or transport data. The notebook can read or write to any diskette. A diskette drive is sometimes called a floppy disk drive. Optical drives include CD and DVD drives. Optical drives support CDs and DVDs, often called discs, which are used to store or transport data and to play music and movies. DVDs have higher capacities than CDs. The notebook can read or write to optical drives as described in the following table. Optical Drive CD-ROM drive DVD-ROM drive CD-RW drive DVD/CD-RW drive Read Write Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes A drive designation is a letter of the alphabet that the notebook uses to identify the drive. To display the drive designation of all the drives in the system, select Start > My Computer. A diskette or disc that can be inserted or removed from a drive is referred to as a drive medium. For example, the term drive media includes diskettes, CDs, and DVDs. 52 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 3 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Drives and Drive Media Caring for Drives and Drive Media CAUTION: To prevent damage to the notebook or a drive and loss of work:
Do not remove the internal hard drive except for repair or replacement. For instructions, see theReplacing the Internal Hard Drive section later in this chapter. Electrostatic discharge can damage electronic components. To prevent electrostatic damage to the notebook or a drive, follow these 2 precautions: (1) Discharge yourself from static electricity before handling a drive by touching a grounded metal object and
(2) Avoid touching the connectors on a drive. For more information about preventing electrostatic damage, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Regulatory and Safety Notices guide, Electrostatic Discharge section. Excessive force can damage drive connectors. When you insert a drive, use only enough force to seat the drive. Handle a drive carefully. Do not drop it. Avoid exposing a hard drive or a diskette to devices with magnetic fields. Products with magnetic fields include video and audio tape erasure products, monitors, and speakers. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, usually while it is placed on a conveyor belt, use x-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a hard drive or a diskette. Do not spray a drive with cleaners. Avoid exposing a drive to liquids or temperature extremes. If you mail a drive, ship it in packaging that protects it from shock, vibration, extreme temperatures, and high humidity. Label the package FRAGILE. CAUTION: To prevent damage to drive media:
Do not open the metal shutter of a diskette or touch the disk within the diskette case. Do not expose a diskette to a strong magnetic field, such as the security field used by a walk-through security device or a handheld security wand. Clean a CD or DVD only with a disc cleaning kit, available from most electronics retailers. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 53 HP-323140-001.book Page 4 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Drives and Drive Media Adding a Drive to the System The internal hard drive and optical drive are standard features of the notebook. The type of optical drive varies by notebook model. An optional drive can be added to the system by connecting it, as instructed in the drive documentation, to one of the USB
(universal serial bus) connectors or to the 1394 connector. Hard drive capacity can also be added with a microdrive PC Card. An SD Card or MMC (multimedia card) can provide additional data storage. Using the IDE Drive Light The IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) light turns on when the internal hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. Identifying the IDE drive light 54 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 5 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Drives and Drive Media Inserting or Removing a Disc Inserting a Disc 1. Turn on the notebook. 2. Press the release button 1 on the drive bezel to release the media tray, then pull the tray outward until it is fully extended 2. 3. Position a CD or one-sided DVD over the tray, label side up. 4. Gently press the center of the disc onto the tray spindle 3 until the disc snaps into place. Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surfaces. (If the media tray is not fully extended, tilt the disc to position it over the tray spindle, then press it downward into position.) 5. Close the media tray 4. Inserting a disc into the optical drive Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 55 HP-323140-001.book Page 6 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Drives and Drive Media Removing a Disc (With Power) 1. Turn on the notebook. 2. Press the release button 1 on the drive bezel to release the media tray, then pull the tray outward until it is fully extended 2. 3. Remove the disc from the tray by gently pushing down on the spindle while pulling up on the outer edges of the disc 3. Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surfaces. If the media tray is not fully extended, tilt the disc as you remove it. 4. Close the media tray 4. 5. Place the disc in a protective case. Removing a disc from the optical drive when power is available 56 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 7 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Drives and Drive Media Removing a Disc (Without Power) If the notebook is turned off or if no power is available, the release button on the optical drive will not work. To remove a disc from an optical drive without using the release button:
1. Insert the end of a small object like a paper clip into the release access 1 in the front bezel of the drive. 2. Press gently on the paper clip until the media tray is released, then pull the tray outward until it is fully extended 2. 3. Remove the disc from the tray by gently pushing down on the spindle while pulling up on the outer edges of the disc 3. Handle the disc by the edges, not the flat surfaces. If the media tray is not fully extended, tilt the disc as you remove it. 4. Close the media tray 4. 5. Place the disc in a protective case. Removing a disc from the optical drive when power is not available Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 57 HP-323140-001.book Page 8 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Drives and Drive Media Playing a Disc You can play a CD in a CD drive or a DVD drive. You can play a DVD only in a DVD drive. The information in this section applies to most optical drives and most disc software. For information about specific disc software, including Windows Media Player, WinDVD, and Easy CD Creator, see the Using Multimedia Software section in Chapter 6. Displaying Media Contents When you insert a CD or DVD into the system, the notebook can play the medium, display its contents, take no action, or display a response prompt on the screen. You can choose how the notebook responds to the insertion of a medium by using the operating system AutoPlay feature. The notebook responds to the following procedures at most AutoPlay settings:
To prevent an audio CD from opening when AutoPlay is enabled on the drive containing it, press the shift key as you insert the CD. To display the contents of a drive medium when the contents are not displayed by AutoPlay:
1.Insert the medium into the drive. 2. Select Start > Run, then type:
explorer x:
(where x = the drive designation of the drive containing the medium). 3. Select the OK button. 58 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 9 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Drives and Drive Media Protecting Playback CAUTION: Inserting or removing any device while running any multimedia application may pause or stop the play. CAUTION: Initiating Standby or Hibernation while playing a drive medium may stop the play or diminish the quality of the play. If Standby or Hibernation is accidentally initiated during playback:
If you see the warning message Putting the computer into Hibernation or Standby may stop the playback. Do you want to continue? select No. (Audio and video may resume or you may need to restart the drive medium.) If Standby or Hibernation initiates and no warning message is displayed, resume from Hibernation or Standby by briefly pressing the power button, then restart the medium. Observing the Copyright Warning It is a criminal offense, under applicable copyright laws, to make unauthorized copies of copyright-protected material, including computer programs, films, broadcasts, and sound recordings. This notebook should not be used for such purposes. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 59 HP-323140-001.book Page 10 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Drives and Drive Media Setting the Boot Order By default, the notebook starts up from the internal hard drive. You can set the notebook to start up from any bootable CD or DVD in the optical drive. A bootable CD or DVD contains files needed by the notebook to start up and operate properly. On some models, you can also start up from a drive connected to the notebook by USB. Startup preferences are set in the Setup utility. The Setup utility is not a Windows utility and does not support the TouchPad. For information about using the Setup utility, see the Using the Setup Utility section in Chapter 9. Replacing the Internal Hard Drive The hard drive in the hard drive bay is the internal hard drive. Remove the internal hard drive only for repair or replacement. CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and loss of work, do not begin this procedure until you have:
Saved your work, closed all open applications, and shut down the notebook. Disconnected the notebook from external power and removed the battery pack. 1. Save your work and close all open applications. 2. Shut down the notebook and close the display. 3. Disconnect the notebook from external power. 4. Remove the battery pack. 510 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 11 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Drives and Drive Media 5. Turn the notebook underside up. 6. Remove the 2 hard drive retaining screws. Removing the hard drive retaining screws Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 511 HP-323140-001.book Page 12 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Drives and Drive Media 7. To remove a hard drive, grasp the hard drive assembly (the hard drive, the hard drive cover, and the hard drive bracket) using the hard drive recess 1. Tilt the hard drive assembly upward 2, then pull the assembly from the hard drive bay 3. Removing an internal hard drive from the hard drive bay 512 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 13 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Drives and Drive Media 8. To insert a hard drive, insert the 2 alignment tabs on the hard drive cover into the 2 alignment slots on the hard drive bay 1, then tilt the hard drive assembly downward into the hard drive bay until it is seated 2. Inserting an internal hard drive into the hard drive bay Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 513 HP-323140-001.book Page 14 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Drives and Drive Media 9. If you have inserted a hard drive, reinsert the 2 hard drive retaining screws. (If you removed but did not replace a hard drive, put the retaining screws in a safe place.) Replacing the hard drive retaining screw 514 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM 6 Multimedia Contents Adjusting Volume . 62 Using the Internal Speakers . 63 Connecting an Audio Device . 63 Connecting an S-Video Device . 65 Connecting the Audio . 65 Connecting the Video . 65 Turning a Video Device On and Off . 66 Changing the Color Television Format . 66 Using Multimedia Software . 67 Using Windows Media Player. 67 Using WinDVD . 67 Using Easy CD Creator . 69 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 61 HP-323140-001.book Page 2 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Multimedia Adjusting Volume Volume can be adjusted by using the audio buttons on the notebook or by using operating system or application volume control software. The mute button overrides all software volume settings. To adjust volume using the audio buttons:
To increase volume, press the increase volume button 1. To decrease volume, press the decrease volume button 2. To mute or restore volume, press the mute button 3. When volume is muted, the mute light 4 turns on. When volume is restored, the mute light turns off. Identifying the audio buttons and mute light 62 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 3 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Multimedia Using the Internal Speakers The internal speakers play sound in stereo from applications, the operating system, games, drive media, the Internet, and other sources. If an external device, such as a headset, is connected to the audio-out jack, the internal speakers are disabled. Identifying the internal speakers Connecting an Audio Device WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones or a headset. CAUTION: To prevent possible damage to an external device, do not plug a monaural (single sound channel) plug into the audio-out jack. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 63 HP-323140-001.book Page 4 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Multimedia The notebook has 2 audio jacks:
The microphone jack 1 connects an optional monaural or stereo microphone. If a monaural microphone is connected, the same information is recorded on both channels. The audio-out jack 2, sometimes called a line-out jack, connects headphones or powered external stereo speakers. The audio-out jack is also used to connect the audio functions of an audio/video device such as a television or VCR. When you connect a device to the audio-out jack:
Use only a 3.5-mm plug. The internal speakers are disabled. Identifying the audio jacks 64 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 5 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Multimedia Connecting an S-Video Device Connecting the Audio The S-Video jack supports video signals only. If you are setting up a configuration that combines audio and video functions, such as playing a DVD movie on your notebook and displaying it on your television, you will need a standard 3.5-mm audio cable available from most computer or electronics retailers. Plug the stereo end of the audio cable into the notebook audio-out jack. Plug the other end of the cable into the audio input jack on the external device. Connecting the Video To transmit video signals through the S-Video jack, you will need a standard S-Video cable available from most computer or electronics retailers. Plug either end of the S-Video cable into the notebook S-Video jack. Plug the other end of the cable into the S-Video input jack on the external device. Identifying the S-Video jack Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 65 HP-323140-001.book Page 6 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Multimedia Turning a Video Device On and Off To turn on a video device that is connected to the notebook, start or restart the notebook. Or, repeatedly press the Fn+F4 hotkeys to switch the image. Pressing the Fn+F4 hotkeys switches the image among the notebook display, any connected displays, and simultaneous display on the notebook and all connected displays. Switching the image to a connected video device turns on the video device. Switching the image to the notebook display only turns off the video device. Changing the Color Television Format Color television formats are modes by which television video signals are sent and received. To send signals between the notebook and a television, both the notebook and the television must be using the same color television format. The NTSC format is common in the United States, Canada, Japan, and South Korea. The PAL format is common in Europe, China, Russia, and Africa, and the PAL-M format is common in Brazil. Other South American and Central American countries may use NTSC, PAL, or PAL-M. Region-specific formats are set at the factory for most notebooks, but the region setting can be changed on any notebook. Color television format settings are changed in the Setup utility. The Setup utility is not a Windows utility and does not support the TouchPad. For information about using the Setup utility, see the Using the Setup Utility section in Chapter 9. 66 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 7 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Multimedia Using Multimedia Software Using Windows Media Player Use Windows Media Player primarily for playing audio CDs. Although video CDs can be played using Windows Media Player, InterVideo WinDVD provides higher quality playback. To open Windows Media Player, insert a CD into the optical drive, then close the tray. Wait several seconds. If Windows Media Player does not open, select Start > All Programs >
Windows Media Player. To play or stop the CD, use the on-screen Play button or Stop button, or use the media hotkeys described in the Hotkeys section of Chapter 3. Using WinDVD WinDVD is an application that enables you to play DVD movies or video CDs. If WinDVD is included with your notebook, the application is preinstalled. Playing a DVD or Video CD For best playback quality, save and close all files and software unrelated to playing the DVD or video CD. If a DVD displays a Playback Of Content From This Region Is Not Permitted error message, stop the DVD, change the region setting, then restart the DVD. For information about changing the region setting, see Managing DVD Region Settings next in this chapter. To play a DVD or video CD:
1. Insert the DVD or video CD into the optical drive. 2. Assign WinDVD to play the video:
If the Microsoft Windows XP AppPicker window is displayed, select Play Video By Using WinDVD. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 67 HP-323140-001.book Page 8 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Multimedia If the Microsoft Windows XP AppPicker window is not displayed, select Start > All Programs > InterVideo WinDVD > InterVideo WinDVD. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. Managing DVD Region Settings Most DVDs that contain copyrighted files also contain region codes. The region codes help protect copyrights internationally. You can play a DVD containing a region code only if the region code on the DVD matches the region setting on your DVD drive. If the region code on a DVD does not match the region setting on your drive, a Playback Of Content From This Region Is Not Permitted message is displayed when you insert the DVD. To play the DVD, you must change the region setting on your DVD drive. CAUTION: The region setting on your DVD drive can be changed only 5 times. The region setting you select the fifth time becomes the permanent region setting on the drive. The number of allowable region changes remaining on the drive is displayed in the Remaining Times Until Permanent field in the WinDVD window. The number in the field includes the fifth and permanent change. To change the region setting on drive media:
1. Insert the DVD into the optical drive. 2. If WinDVD does not open after a short pause, select Start >
All Programs > InterVideo WinDVD > InterVideo WinDVD. 3. Select the Properties icon in the lower right corner of the window. 4. Select the General tab. 5. Select the button for the region. 6. Select the OK button. 68 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 9 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Multimedia Using Easy CD Creator Easy CD Creator is a data transfer utility that enables you to create or duplicate optical drive media. The utility is installed on select models and can be used with any CD or DVD supported by any optical drive in the system. When Easy CD Creator is installed, a Burn CD & DVDs with Roxio icon is displayed at Start > All Programs > Start Menu. Understanding Easy CD Creator Features Easy CD Creator includes 2 applications: DirectCD and Easy CD Creator. The Easy CD Creator application includes CD Copier. Use DirectCD with Windows Explorer to drag-and-drop data files between your hard drive and a CD or DVD or between your hard drive and a network drive. DirectCD is often used to back up data files or to share them with other people. Although DirectCD can be used with most application data files, including Microsoft Office data files, it cannot be used with audio files such as MP3 files. Use Easy CD Creator, which includes CD Copier, to copy either data files such as Microsoft Office files, or audio files such as MP3 files, to a CD or DVD. Use Easy CD Creator to copy individual audio files to a CD or DVD, for example, to create a CD containing only your favorites. Use CD Copier to duplicate a CD or DVD. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 69 HP-323140-001.book Page 10 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Multimedia Preparing to Use Easy CD Creator CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to a CD or DVD:
external power source. Do not write to a CD or DVD while the notebook is running on battery power. Before writing to a CD or DVD, connect the notebook to a reliable Before writing to a CD or DVD, close all open applications
(including screen savers and antivirus software) except Easy CD Creator Basic. Do not copy directly from a CD or DVD to another CD or DVD or from a network drive to a CD or DVD. Instead, copy from a CD, DVD, or a network drive to your hard drive, then copy from your hard drive to the CD or DVD. Do not type on the notebook keyboard or move the notebook while the notebook is writing to a CD or DVD. The write process is sensitive to vibration. Choosing Recording Media HP recommends using high-quality media that correspond to the maximum speed of the optical drive. The notebook can write or copy to CDs and DVDs which provide one-time, non-erasable recording or to CDs and DVDs which provide erasable recording. Responding to the UDF Prompt The first time you insert a CD or DVD into an optical drive, you may be prompted to install Universal Disk Format (UDF) Reader. When UDF Reader is installed, a CD or DVD created with DirectCD on your notebook can be used in another computer on which DirectCD is not installed. Even if UDF Reader is installed on your notebook, a CD or DVD created with DirectCD software can be used in a compatible optical drive only if you select the Rearrange the Files option as you create the CD or DVD. 610 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 11 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Multimedia Formatting Recording Media You can purchase optical drive media that either are or are not formatted for DirectCD. To use DirectCD, use a CD or DVD formatted for DirectCD. To use Easy CD Creator or CD Copier, do not use a CD or DVD formatted for DirectCD. To erase DirectCD formatting from a CD or DVD so the CD or DVD can be used with Easy CD Creator or CD Copier:
1. Insert the CD or DVD into the optical drive. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Easy CD Creator Basic >
CD-RW Eraser. 3. Select the Erase button. 4. Select the OK button. Selecting Easy CD Creator Settings To use DirectCD, Easy CD Creator, or CD Copier, the default settings shown in the following table must be selected. These settings are compatible; for example, the settings for DirectCD do not conflict with the settings for CD Copier. Application DirectCD Easy CD Creator CD Copier Required Settings Enable Auto Insert Notification Disable Disk-at-Once and Enable Track-at-Once Disable Disk-at-Once Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 611 HP-323140-001.book Page 12 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Multimedia Auto Insert Notification settings are selected through the operating system. To select Disk-at-once settings:
1.Select Start > All Programs > Roxio Easy CD Creator 5 >
Applications > CD Copier. 2. Select the Advanced tab. 3. Clear the Disk-at-Once check box. 4. Select the Set as Default button. To select Track-at-once settings:
1.Select Start > All Programs > Roxio Easy CD Creator 5. 2. The fourth item on the status bar at the lower edge of the CD Project window indicates whether Track-at-Once or Disk-at-Once is selected. If Track-at-Once is displayed on the status bar, Track-at-Once is already enabled. If Disk-at-Once is selected, double-click Disk-at-Once to enable Track-at-Once. 612 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM 7 Communications Contents Modem . 72 Connecting the Modem . 73 Using the Modem While Traveling Internationally . 76 Accessing Communication Software. 79 Finding AT Command Information. 79 Network . 710 Connecting the Network Cable . 711 Turning a Network Connection Off and On . 712 Accessing the Network at Startup . 712 Infrared. 712 Setting Up an Infrared Transmission. 713 Avoiding Standby While Using Infrared. 714 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 71 HP-323140-001.book Page 2 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Communications Modem All notebook models include an RJ-11 telephone jack, and some models ship with a preinstalled modem. A modem cable with RJ-11 connectors at each end is included with select models. You need a modem cable to connect a modem. If your model did not include a modem cable, a modem cable can be purchased from most computer or electronics retailers. If you purchased a notebook with an internal modem in a country where RJ-11 telephone jacks are not standard, a country-specific modem adapter is included with the notebook. An internal modem supports:
All applications supported by the operating system. V.34 ITU (International Telecommunications Union) analog modem recommendations for speeds up to 33.6 Kbps. V.44 data compression algorithm. V.90/V.92 ITU digital/analog modem pair recommendations for speeds up to 56 Kbps. The digital/analog modem pair rates allow faster downloads only from compliant digital sources. Maximum achievable download rates are currently unknown, may not reach 56 Kbps, and will vary with line conditions. Maximum achievable upload rates are limited to 48 Kbps, may not reach 48 Kbps, and will vary with line conditions. 72 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 3 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Communications Connecting the Modem Selecting Connectors A modem must be connected to an analog telephone line. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a telephone cable into the RJ-45 network jack. CAUTION: Jacks for digital PBX systems may resemble RJ-11 telephone jacks, but are not compatible with the modem. Jacks for analog telephone lines and procedures for connecting the modem vary by country:
If you are connecting a modem in a country where RJ-11 telephone jacks are standard, follow the instructions in Connecting a Modem to an RJ-11 Jack next in this section. If you are connecting a modem in a country where RJ-11 telephone jacks are not standard, a modem adapter specific to the country in which you purchased the notebook is included with the notebook. Follow the instructions in Connecting a Modem with an Adapter later in this section. If you plan to use a modem outside the country in which you purchased the notebook, you can purchase adapters specific for the countries on your itinerary from most computer or electronics retailers. For information about using country-specific software configurations, see Using the Modem While Traveling Internationally later in this section. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 73 HP-323140-001.book Page 4 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Communications Connecting a Modem to an RJ-11 Jack To connect a modem to an analog telephone line that has an RJ-11 telephone jack:
1. Identify the RJ-11 1 jack on the notebook. 2. If your modem cable has noise suppression circuitry 2, which prevents interference with TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the notebook. 3. Plug the modem cable into the RJ-11 telephone jack (not the RJ-45 network jack) on the notebook 3. 4. Plug the other end of the modem cable into an RJ-11 telephone jack (not into an RJ-45 network jack or a PBX jack) 4. Connecting a modem to an RJ-11 telephone wall jack (Telephone wall jacks vary in appearance by region and country.) WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, disconnect the modem from the telephone network before accessing an internal compartment of the notebook. Internal compartments include the memory compartment and the battery and hard drive bays. 74 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 5 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Communications Connecting a Modem with an Adapter To connect a modem to an analog telephone line that does not have an RJ-11 telephone jack:
1. Identify the RJ-11 jack 1 on the notebook. 2. If the modem cable has noise suppression circuitry 2, which prevents interference with TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the notebook. 3. Plug the modem cable into the RJ-11 telephone jack (not the RJ-45 network jack) on the notebook 3. 4. Plug the modem cable into the country-specific modem adapter 4. 5. Plug the country-specific modem adapter into the telephone jack 5. Connecting a modem with a modem adapter (Telephone wall jacks vary in appearance by region and country.) WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, disconnect the modem from the telephone network before accessing an internal compartment of the notebook. Internal compartments include the memory compartment and the battery and hard drive bays. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 75 HP-323140-001.book Page 6 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Communications Using the Modem While Traveling Internationally An internal modem is configured to function in, and meet the operating standards of, the country in which you purchased the notebook. To use an internal modem in other countries, you must add country-specific modem configurations. Displaying the Current Country Configuration To display the current country configuration, select Start >
Control Panel > Date, Time, Language, and Regional Options category > Regional and Language Options icon > Regional Options tab. The current country configuration of the modem is displayed in the Location panel. Adding a Country Configuration CAUTION: To prevent the loss of your current country configuration, do not delete or replace your current country configuration. Additional country configurations can be added without deleting the current configuration. CAUTION: To prevent modem malfunction and violation of telecommunications regulations and laws, use the modem only with the country configuration for the country in which you are using the modem. To add a country configuration:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections category. 2. From the See Also menu in the left column of the window, select Phone and Modem Options > Dialing Rules tab. 3. Select the New button, then type a name for the new location in the Location Name field. 76 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 7 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Communications 4. Select a country or region for the new location from the Country/Region list. If you select a country or region that is not supported by the modem, the country configuration defaults to USA or UK. 5. Select the OK button > OK button. Solving Travel Connection Problems If you experience connection problems while using a modem outside the country in which you purchased the notebook, the following suggestions may be helpful. Before changing any settings, you may want to write down your current settings so you can quickly replace those settings when you return home. Check the Line A modem requires an analog, not a digital, telephone line. A line described as a PBX line is usually a digital line. A telephone line described as a data line, fax machine line, modem line, or standard telephone line is probably an analog line. Check the Dialing Mode Dial a few digits on the telephone, then listen for clicks or tones. Clicks indicate that the telephone line supports pulse dialing. Tones indicate that the telephone line supports tone dialing. To set an internal modem to support a dialing mode:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections category. 2. From the See Also menu in the left column of the window, select Phone and Modem Options > Dialing Rules tab. 3. Select your location, then select the Edit button. 4. Select the Tone or Pulse radio button. 5. Select the OK button > OK button. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 77 HP-323140-001.book Page 8 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Communications Check the Telephone Number Dial the telephone number on the telephone, verify that the remote modem is answering, then hang up. Check the Dial Tone If a modem receives a dial tone it does not recognize, the modem will not dial and will display a No Dial Tone error message. To set the modem to ignore all dial tones before dialing:
1.Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections category. 2. From the See Also menu in the left column of the window, select Phone and Modem Options >
Modems tab. 3. Select your modem > Properties button > Modem tab. 4. Clear the Wait For Dial Tone Before Dialing check box. 5. Select the OK button > OK button. If you continue to receive the No Dial Tone error message after clearing the check box:
1.Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections category. 2. From the See Also menu in the left column of the Network and Internet Connections window, select Phone and Modem Options > Dialing Rules tab. 3. Select your location, then select the Edit button. 4. Select your location from the Country/Region list. If you select a country or region that is not supported by the modem, the country configuration defaults to USA or UK. 5. Select the OK button. 6. In the Phone and Modem Options window, select the Modems tab. 78 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 9 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Communications 7. Select your modem > Properties button > Modem tab. 8. Clear the Wait For Dial Tone Before Dialing check box. 9. Select the OK button > OK button. Accessing Communication Software To access preinstalled modem software, including software for terminal emulation and data transfer, select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Communications, then select an application, wizard, or utility. Finding AT Command Information It is not necessary to use AT commands with most modem software. If you prefer to use AT commands, refer on the Documentation Library CD to:
Modem Commands Guidelines (Advanced Users Only) for information about accessing HyperTerminal, identifying the modem model in your notebook, and using AT commands. The Lucent/Agere Command Set (Advanced Users Only) guide for the AT commands supported by a Lucent/Agere modem. If your notebook shipped with an internal modem, that modem supports the Lucent/Agere command set. For command updates and supplementary information about your Lucent/Agere modem, visit:
http://www.agere.com The Lucent/Agere command set guide is provided on the Documentation Library CD in English only. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 79 HP-323140-001.book Page 10 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Communications Network All notebook models ship with an RJ-45 network jack. A network cable with RJ-45 connectors at each end is included with select models. The notebook can be connected to a network whether or not the internal modem is connected to a telephone line. If your notebook is connected to a network, you may want to confer with your network administrator before changing network settings. The notebook supports network speeds up to 10 Mbps when connected to a 10BaseT network and 100 Mbps when connected to a 100BaseTX network. 710 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 | User Guide Part 4 | Users Manual | 2.24 MiB | December 08 2003 |
HP-323140-001.book Page 11 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Communications Connecting the Network Cable A network cable has an 8-pin RJ-45 network connector at each end and may contain noise suppression circuitry, which prevents interference with TV and radio reception. To connect the cable:
1. Identify the RJ-45 network jack 1 on the notebook. 2. Orient the end of a network cable with noise suppression circuitry 2 toward the notebook. 3. Plug the network cable into the notebook RJ-45 network jack 3. 4. Plug the other end of the cable into the network RJ-45 jack 4. Connecting a network cable WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock, disconnect the network cable before accessing an internal compartment of the notebook. Internal compartments include the memory compartment and the battery and hard drive bays. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 711 HP-323140-001.book Page 12 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Communications Turning a Network Connection Off and On To conserve power, turn off a network connection you are not using. To turn off a network connection, log off the network, then disconnect the network cable. To turn on a network connection, connect the network cable, then log on to the network. Accessing the Network at Startup To connect the notebook to a PXE (Preboot eXecution Environment) server during startup, you must enable the internal NIC for startup, then respond to the Network Service Boot prompt each time you want to connect to the server. To enable the NIC for startup and set the notebook to display the Network Service Boot prompt each time the notebook is started or restarted, set your preferences in the Setup utility. The Setup utility is not a Windows utility and does not support the TouchPad. For more information about using the Setup utility, refer to the Using the Setup Utility section in Chapter 9 of this guide. To respond to the Network Service Boot prompt, press F12 while the prompt F12 = Boot from LAN appears very briefly in the lower left corner of the screen before Windows loads. Infrared The notebook is IrDA-compliant and can communicate with another infrared-equipped device that is also IrDA-compliant. The IrDA connection speed standard is 4 megabits per second
(Mbps). The infrared port supports low-speed connections up to 115 kilobits per second (Kbps) as well as high-speed connections up to 4 Mbps. 712 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 13 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Communications Infrared signals are sent through an invisible beam of infrared light and must have an unobstructed line of sight. Infrared performance may vary with the performance of infrared peripherals, the distance and angle between infrared devices, and the applications being used. Linking to an infrared device Setting Up an Infrared Transmission For information about using infrared software and enabling or disabling infrared ports, refer to the operating system Help files and to the documentation included with the external infrared device. To set up 2 infrared devices, such as the notebook and an optional printer, for optimal transmission:
Position the devices so that their infrared ports face each other at a distance of no more than 3.3 feet (1 meter). Position the ports so that they face each other directly. The maximum capture angle is 30 degrees, so the ports must be aligned no more than 15 degrees off center vertically or horizontally. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 713 HP-323140-001.book Page 14 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Communications Shield the ports from direct sunlight, flashing incandescent light, and fluorescent light. Be sure that signals from a remote control or other wireless device (such as a cell phone, a headset, or an audio device) do not aim at either port. During the transmission, do not move either device and do not allow objects or movement to disrupt the beam. Avoiding Standby While Using Infrared Standby is not compatible with infrared transmission. If the notebook is in Standby, an infrared transmission cannot be initiated. If Standby initiates during an infrared transmission, the transmission stops. To resume from Standby, briefly press the power button. The transmission resumes when the notebook resumes from Standby. 714 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM 8 Hardware Options and Upgrades Contents Connecting a Powered Device . 82 Connecting a USB Device . 82 Using a PC Card. 83 Selecting a PC Card. 83 Configuring a PC Card . 84 Inserting a PC Card . 84 Stopping and Removing a PC Card. 85 Using an SD Card or MMC . 86 Using the SD Card Light . 86 Inserting an SD Card or MMC . 87 Removing an SD Card or MMC . 88 Disabling or Restarting an SD Card or MMC . 88 Increasing Memory . 89 Displaying Memory Information. 89 Removing or Inserting a Memory Module . 810 Connecting an Optional Cable Lock . 815 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 81 HP-323140-001.book Page 2 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Connecting a Powered Device To connect the notebook to an optional external device that has a power cord:
1. Be sure the device is turned off. 2. Connect the device to the jack or connector on the notebook specified by the device manufacturer. 3. Plug the device power cord into a grounded electrical outlet. 4. Turn on the device. If a properly connected external monitor or other display device does not display an image, try pressing the Fn+F4 hotkeys to switch the image to the new device. To disconnect a powered external device from the notebook:
1. Turn off the device. 2. Disconnect the device from the notebook. Connecting a USB Device USB (universal serial bus) is a hardware interface that can be used to connect external devices such as a USB keyboard, mouse, drive, printer, scanner, or hub to the notebook. A hub is a connecting device that can be either powered or unpowered. USB hubs can be connected to a USB connector on the notebook or to other USB devices. Hubs support varying numbers of USB devices and are used to increase the number of USB devices in the system. Powered hubs must be connected to external power. Unpowered hubs must be connected either to a USB connector on the notebook or to a port on a powered hub. The USB connectors on the notebook support USB 2.0- and 1.1-compliant devices. 82 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 3 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades By default, USB devices function only while the operating system is loaded. To use a USB keyboard or hub connected to a USB connector on the notebook during startup (before Windows loads) or in a non-Windows application or utility, enable USB legacy support in the Setup utility. For more information about using the Setup utility, see the Using the Setup Utility section in Chapter 9. Identifying the 3 USB connectors on the notebook Using a PC Card A PC Card is a credit cardsized accessory designed to conform to the standard specifications of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA). The notebook PC Card slot supports both 32-bit CardBus and 16-bit PC Cards. PC Cards can be used to add modem, sound, storage, wireless communication, or digital camera functions to the notebook. Selecting a PC Card A Type I or Type II PC Card can be used. Zoomed video cards are not supported. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 83 HP-323140-001.book Page 4 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Configuring a PC Card CAUTION: If you install all of the software or any of the enablers provided by a PC Card manufacturer, you may not be able to use other PC Cards. If you are instructed by the documentation included with your PC Card to install device drivers:
Install only the device drivers for your operating system. Do not install other software, such as card services, socket services, or enablers, that may also be supplied by the PC Card manufacturer. Inserting a PC Card CAUTION: To prevent damage to the PC Card connectors:
Use minimal force when inserting a PC Card into a PC Card slot. Do not move or transport the notebook while a PC Card is inserted. 1. Hold the PC Card label-side up with the connectors facing the notebook. 2. Gently push the card into the slot until the card is seated. Inserting a PC Card 84 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 5 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Stopping and Removing a PC Card CAUTION: To prevent loss of work or an unresponsive system, stop the PC Card before removing it. Stopping a PC Card, even if it is not in use, conserves power. 1. Close all applications and complete all activities that are supported by the PC Card. 2. To stop a PC Card, select the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the taskbar, then select the PC Card. (To display the Safely Remove Hardware icon, select in the taskbar the icon for Show Hidden Icons.) 3. To release the PC Card, press the PC Card eject button 1. (If the PC Card button does not extend while a PC Card is in the PC Card slot, press the button once to extend the button, then press the button again to release the PC Card.) 4. Gently pull out the PC Card 2. Removing a PC Card Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 85 HP-323140-001.book Page 6 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Using an SD Card or MMC CAUTION: To prevent damage to the SD Card connectors:
Use minimal force when inserting an SD Card or MMC into an SD Card slot. Do not move or transport the notebook while an SD Card or MMC is inserted. SD (Secure Digital) Cards and MMCs
(multimedia cards) are flash memory cards that provide secure data storage and convenient data sharing. These cards are often used with SD-equipped cameras and PDAs as well as notebooks. The SD Card features on the notebook support both SD Cards and MMCs. Using the SD Card Light The SD Card light turns on when an inserted SD Card or MMC is being accessed. The SD Card light turns off when an inserted SD Card or MMC is inactive or when the SD Card slot is empty. Identifying the SD Card light 86 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 7 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Inserting an SD Card or MMC To insert an SD Card or MMC:
1. Hold the card label-side up with the connectors facing the notebook. 2. Gently push the card into the SD Card slot until the card is seated. (The card will extend outward slightly beyond the notebook.) Inserting an SD Card or MMC Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 87 HP-323140-001.book Page 8 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Removing an SD Card or MMC To remove an SD Card or MMC:
1. Close all applications and complete all activities that are supported by the card. (To stop a data transfer, select the cancel button in the operating system Copying window.) 2. Push the card inward until it is released 1. 3. Pull the card out of the slot 2. Releasing and removing an SD Card or MMC Disabling or Restarting an SD Card or MMC An inserted SD Card or MMC uses power even when the card is not in use. Disabling the card conserves power. To disable an inserted SD Card or MMC, double-click the My Computer icon on the Windows Desktop, right-click the drive assigned to the card, then select Eject. (The card is stopped but is not released from the SD Card slot.) 88 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 9 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades To restart the card, remove, then reinsert, the card. For instructions, see Inserting an SD Card or MMC and Removing an SD Card or MMC in this chapter. Increasing Memory You can increase the amount of RAM (random access memory) in the notebook with an optional HP-approved memory module. The notebook memory slot supports one 128-MB, 256-MB, 512-MB, or 1024-MB memory module. Some notebook models ship with a vacant memory slot. On other models the memory slot contains a preinstalled memory module that can be replaced at any time. Displaying Memory Information When RAM is increased, the operating system increases the hard drive space reserved for the hibernation file. If you experience problems with Hibernation after increasing RAM, verify that your hard drive has enough free space for the larger hibernation file. To display the amount of RAM in the system:
Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > System icon > General tab. To display both the amount of free space on your hard drive and the amount of space required by the hibernation file:
Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > Power Options icon > Hibernate tab. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 89 HP-323140-001.book Page 10 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Removing or Inserting a Memory Module WARNING: To prevent exposure to electrical shock, access only the memory compartment during this procedure. The memory compartment and the battery and hard drive bays are the only user-accessible internal compartments on the notebook. All other areas that require a tool to access should be opened only by an HP authorized service provider. WARNING: To prevent exposure to electrical shock and damage to the notebook, shut down the notebook, unplug the power cord, and remove the battery pack before installing a memory module. CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components: before beginning this procedure, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. For more information about preventing electrostatic damage, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Regulatory and Safety Notices guide, Electrostatic Discharge chapter. 1. Save your work and shut down the notebook. If you are not sure whether the notebook is off or in Hibernation, briefly press the power button. If your work returns to the screen, save your work, exit all applications, then shut down the notebook. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the notebook. 3. Disconnect the power cord. 4. Remove the battery pack. 810 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 11 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades 5. Turn the notebook underside up. 6. Remove the memory compartment screw 1, then lift up and remove the memory compartment cover 2. Opening the memory compartment Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 811 HP-323140-001.book Page 12 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades 7. Remove or insert the memory module. To remove a memory module:
a. Pull away the retention clips on each side of the module 1. (The module tilts upward.) b. Grasp the edges of the module and gently pull the module out of the memory slot 2. c. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. Removing a memory module 812 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 13 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades To insert a memory module:
a. Align the keyed (notched) edge of the module with the keyed area in the memory slot 1. b. With the module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory compartment, press the module into the memory slot until it is seated 2. c. Push the module downward until the retention clips snap into place 3. Inserting a memory module Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 813 HP-323140-001.book Page 14 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades 8. Align the tabs on the memory compartment cover with the cover slots on the notebook, then tilt the cover downward until it is seated 1. 9. Reinsert and tighten the memory compartment screw 2. 10. Replace the battery pack (if you removed a battery pack at the beginning of this procedure), reconnect the notebook to external power, then restart the notebook. Closing the memory compartment 814 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 15 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades Connecting an Optional Cable Lock The purpose of security solutions is to act as a deterrent. These solutions do not prevent the product from being mishandled or stolen. An optional cable lock is a security device that prevents unauthorized removal of the notebook. Loop the cable around a secure object, then insert the cable lock 1 into the security cable slot 2 and lock it with the cable lock key 3. Connecting an optional cable lock Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 815 HP-323140-001.book Page 16 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Hardware Options and Upgrades 816 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM 9 Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Contents Updating Software . 92 Preparing for a Software Update . 92 Downloading and Installing an Update . 94 Backing Up and Restoring Data. 97 Setting a System Restore Point . 97 Restoring to a System Restore Point . 97 Repairing or Reinstalling the Operating System . 98 Repairing the Operating System . 98 Reinstalling the Operating System . 99 Reinstalling Device Drivers and Other Software. 910 Installing a Retail Version of an Operating System. 911 Using the Setup Utility. 911 Opening the Setup Utility . 911 Navigating and Selecting in the Setup Utility . 912 Restoring Setup Utility Default Settings . 912 Exiting the Setup Utility . 912 Using the Support Utilities. 913 Using the Help and Support Window . 913 Using Support Telephone Numbers . 914 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 91 HP-323140-001.book Page 2 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Updating Software For optimal notebook performance and to make sure your notebook remains compatible with changing technologies, install the latest versions of the software provided with your notebook as they become available. To update notebook software:
1. Prepare for any update by identifying your notebook type, series or family, and model. Prepare for a ROM (read-only memory) update by identifying the ROM version currently installed on the notebook. 2. Access the updates at the HP Web site. 3. Download and install the updates. The notebook ROM stores the BIOS (basic input-output system). The BIOS determines how the notebook hardware interacts with the operating system and external devices and also supports such notebook services as time and date. Preparing for a Software Update If your notebook connects to a network, consult with your network administrator before installing any software updates, particularly a ROM update. Accessing Notebook Product Information To access the updates for your notebook, you will need the following information:
The product category is Notebook. The product family name and series number are printed on the display bezel. More complete model information is provided on the serial number label on the underside of the notebook. 92 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 3 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities The product name, notebook model, and notebook serial number are also displayed in the same section of the Setup utility that displays ROM information, as described in the next section. Accessing Notebook ROM Information To determine whether an available ROM update is a later ROM version than the ROM version currently installed on the notebook, you need to know the version of the currently installed ROM. ROM information is displayed in the Setup utility. The Setup utility is a non-Windows utility that does not support the TouchPad. For complete information about using the Setup utility, see the Using the Setup Utility section in Chapter 9. 1. To open the Setup utility, turn on or restart the notebook. 2. Before Windows opens and while the F10 = ROM Based Setup prompt is displayed in the lower left section of the screen, press F10. 3. Use the arrow keys to select the File menu, then press enter. 4. Use the down arrow key to select System Info, then press enter. (The ROM version and date are displayed in the System BIOS Version field.) 5. To close the System Info window and exit the Setup utility without changing any settings:
a. Press esc to close the window. b. Use the arrow keys to select the File menu, then press enter. c. Use the arrow keys to select Ignore changes and exit, then press enter. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 93 HP-323140-001.book Page 4 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Downloading and Installing an Update Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a SoftPaq. Some ROM updates may be packaged in a compressed file called a RomPaq. Other ROM updates may be provided as a CPQFlash SoftPaq. Most download packages contain a file named Readme.txt. A Readme.txt file contains detailed descriptive, installation, and troubleshooting information about the download. The Readme.txt files included with RomPaqs are English only. The following sections provide instructions for downloading and installing:
A ROM update. A SoftPaq containing an update other than a ROM update. Downloading and Installing a ROM Update CAUTION: To prevent serious damage to the notebook or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a ROM update only while the notebook is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter or a DC cable. (Do not download or install a ROM update while the notebook is docked or running on battery power.) During the download and installation:
Do not unplug the notebook from the electrical outlet. Do not shut down the notebook or initiate Standby or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. Downloading a ROM Update:
1. Access the page at the HP Web site that provides software for your notebook: Select Start > Help and Support, then select a software update link. Or, visit the HP Web Site at:
http://www.hp.com/support 2. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your notebook and access the ROM update you want to download. 94 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 5 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities 3. At the download area:
a. Record the date, name, or other identifier of any ROM update that is later than the ROM currently installed on your notebook. (You may need to identify the update later, after it has been downloaded to the hard drive.) b. Record the path to the default or custom location on the hard drive to which the ROM package will download.
(You may need to access the ROM package after it has been downloaded.) c. Follow the online instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Installing a ROM Update ROM installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed:
1. Open Windows Explorer. To open Windows Explorer from the Start button, select Start > All Programs > Accessories >
Windows Explorer. 2. In the left pane of the Windows Explorer window, select My Computer > your hard drive designation. (The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk C.) Then follow the path you recorded earlier to the folder on your hard drive containing the update. 3. To begin the installation, open the folder, then double-click the file with an .exe extension, for example, Filename.exe.
(The ROM update installation begins.) 4. To complete the installation, follow the instructions on the screen. After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from the destination folder. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 95 HP-323140-001.book Page 6 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Downloading and Installing a Non-ROM SoftPaq To update software other than a ROM update:
1. Access the page at the HP Web site that provides software for your notebook: Select Start > Help and Support, then select a software update link. Or, visit the HP Web site at:
http://www.hp.com/support 2. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify your notebook and access the SoftPaq you want to download. 3. At the download area:
a. Write down the date, name, or other identifier of the SoftPaq you plan to download. (You will need to identify the update later, after it has been downloaded to the hard drive.) b. Follow the online instructions to download the SoftPaq to the hard drive. 4. When the download is complete, open Windows Explorer. To open Windows Explorer from the Start button, select Start >
All Programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer. 5. In the left pane of the Windows Explorer window, select My Computer > your hard drive designation, which is typically Local Disk C > HP. 6. In the HP folder, select the name or number of the software package you have downloaded. 7. Select the file that includes an .exe extension, for example, Filename.exe. (The installation begins.) 8. To complete the installation, follow the instructions on the screen. After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from the HP folder. 96 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 7 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Backing Up and Restoring Data The System Restore utility enables you to safeguard your system files and functional configurations by using System Restore points. System Restore points are restorable, benchmark snapshots of your system. The notebook may set System Restore points whenever you change personal settings or add software or hardware. Setting System Restore points manually provides additional protection for your system files and settings. HP recommends that you set System Restore points:
Before you add or extensively modify software or hardware. Periodically, whenever the system is performing optimally. Setting a System Restore Point To set a System Restore point manually:
1. Select Start > Help & Support > Tools. (Notebook and diagnostic information is displayed.) 2. Select System Restore, then follow the on-screen instructions for setting a Restore Point. Restoring to a System Restore Point To restore the notebook to a System Restore point:
1. Select Start > Help & Support > Tools. (Notebook and diagnostic information is displayed.) 2. Select System Restore, then follow the on-screen instructions for restoring the notebook to a Restore Point. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 97 HP-323140-001.book Page 8 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Repairing or Reinstalling the Operating System The OS CD included with your notebook can be used to repair or reinstall the operating system. Both operations may take 1 to 2 hours to complete. Repairing the operating system preserves your data and settings. Reinstalling the operating system deletes all files on the notebook. After the operating system has been reinstalled, all device drivers must also be reinstalled. HP recommends that you try to restore your system by using the System Restore utility before you consider repairing or reinstalling your operating system. For restoration instructions, see Backing Up and Restoring Data earlier in this chapter. If a System Restore restoration fails to restore functionality, first try to repair the operating system. If the repair procedure does not restore functionality, you may need to reinstall the operating system. Repairing the Operating System To repair the operating system without deleting your personal data:
1. Connect the notebook to external power and turn on the notebook. 2. Immediately insert the OS CD (included with the notebook) into the optical drive. 3. Press and hold the power button for 5 seconds to turn off the notebook. 4. Briefly press the power button to start the notebook. 5. When prompted, press any key to boot from CD. (After a few minutes, the Welcome to Setup screen is displayed.) 98 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 9 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities 6. Press enter to continue. (A Licensing Agreement screen is displayed.) 7. Press F8 to accept the agreement and continue. (The Setup window is displayed.) 8. Press R to repair the selected Windows installation. (The repair process begins.) After the repair process is complete, which may take up to 2 hours, the notebook restarts in Windows. Reinstalling the Operating System If the System Recovery and operating system repair procedures did not restore functionality to your notebook, it may be necessary to reinstall the operating system. CAUTION: Personal data and any software you have installed on the notebook will be lost during the operating system reinstallation procedure described in this section. To protect your data, back up your My Documents folder before beginning the procedure. For back up information and instructions, select Start > Help and Support. Also see Backing Up and Restoring Data earlier in this section. During the reinstallation, you may be prompted for your product key. The product key is displayed on the Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label affixed to the underside of the notebook. To reinstall the operating system using the OS CD included with the notebook:
1. Connect the notebook to external power and turn on the notebook. 2. Immediately insert the OS CD into the optical drive. 3. Press and hold the power button for 5 seconds to turn off the notebook. 4. Briefly press the power button to start the notebook. 5. When prompted, press any key to boot from CD. (After a few minutes, the Welcome to Setup screen is displayed.) Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 99 HP-323140-001.book Page 10 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities 6. Press enter to continue. (A Licensing Agreement screen is displayed.) 7. Press F8 to accept the agreement and continue. (The Setup window is displayed.) 8. Press esc to continue installing a fresh copy of the operating system. 9. Press enter to set up the operating system. 10. Press C to continue setup using this partition. 11. Select Format the partition using the NTFS file system
(Quick), then press enter. (A caution is displayed. The caution explains that formatting this drive will delete all current files.) 12. Press F to format the drive. (The reinstallation process begins.) After the repair process is complete, which may take up to 2 hours, the notebook restarts in Windows, and you can begin to reinstall device drivers. Reinstalling Device Drivers and Other Software After the installation process is complete, you must reinstall drivers. To reinstall drivers using the Driver Recovery CD included with the notebook:
1. While running Windows, insert the Driver Recovery CD into the optical drive. If the CD does not open within several seconds, select Start >
Run. Then type D:\SWSETUP\APPINSTL\SETUP.EXE (where D indicates the optical drive). 2. Follow the on-screen instructions for installing drivers. After the drivers are reinstalled, you must reinstall any software you added to the notebook. Reinstallation instructions are usually provided on the software CD, in the CD package, or at the manufacturers Web site. 910 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 11 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Installing a Retail Version of an Operating System The Windows operating system provided on the notebook or on a restoration CD is enhanced by HP. The HP enhancements add power and security features and provide supplementary support for external devices such as drives and PC Cards. CAUTION: Replacing an operating system enhanced by HP with a retail version of an operating system will result in the loss of all HP enhancements. In some cases, the loss of these enhancements may result in an unresponsive system or the loss of complete USB support. Using the Setup Utility The Setup utility is a preinstalled, ROM-based information and customization utility that can be used even when your operating system is not working or will not load. The utility reports information about the notebook and provides settings for startup, password, port, Setup utility appearance, and other preferences. Opening the Setup Utility To access most settings:
1. Start up or restart the notebook. 2. Before Windows opens and while the F10 = ROM Based Setup prompt is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen, press F10. On some models, you must start up (not restart) the notebook to access the settings for a hard drive password. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 911 HP-323140-001.book Page 12 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Navigating and Selecting in the Setup Utility Because the Setup utility is not Windows-based, it does not support the TouchPad. Navigation and selection are by keystroke. To navigate, use the up and down arrow keys or tab. To select an item, use the arrow keys to select the item, then press enter. To close a display but remain in the Setup utility, press esc. An on-screen guide to navigation and selection is displayed at the lower edge of most Setup utility submenu screens. To minimize keystrokes by using the <Alt> Key Activates Accelerators feature:
1. Press and hold alt. (A letter or number in most on-screen items is highlighted.) 2. Press the keyboard key corresponding to the highlighted letter or number in the item you want to select. For example, to select an on-screen OK button, press alt. When the O in OK is highlighted, press O. Restoring Setup Utility Default Settings To return all Setup utility settings to default values, select File menu > Restore Defaults. (Identification information, including ROM version information, is retained.) Exiting the Setup Utility The Setup Utility exit options are on the File menu. When you select either option, Windows opens after the Setup utility closes. To close the utility and save your changes from the current session, select Save changes and exit. To close the utility without saving changes from the current session, select Ignore changes and exit. 912 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 13 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Using the Support Utilities If you cannot solve a notebook problem by using this guide or the supplementary information, including the Troubleshooting guide, on the Documentation Library CD, you may need to contact HP. Using the Help and Support Window Select Start > Help and Support or press the Fn+F1 hotkeys. The Help and Support window provides access to information about using your operating system and to support areas of the HP Web site. Most of the support areas are available in several languages, but some links may be unavailable in some regions. You can use the links in the Help and Support window to:
Initiate an online service event with a support specialist. Download the latest drivers, utilities, and software updates for your notebook. Obtain information about your notebook such as specifications, white papers, customer advisories, and all documentation included with your notebook. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 913 HP-323140-001.book Page 14 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Software Updates, Restorations and Utilities Using Support Telephone Numbers Obtaining Support Telephone Numbers To obtain a list of worldwide customer support telephone numbers, use either of the following methods:
Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance icon > System icon. Then, near the lower edge of the System Properties window, select the Support Information button. Refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet (English only) included with your notebook to contact an HP Customer Care Center. Preparing to Call Technical Support To provide the fastest possible resolution of your problem, have the notebook and the following information available when you call:
Serial number and model description, which are provided on labels affixed to the notebook. Purchase date on the invoice. Conditions under which the problem occurred. Error messages that have been displayed. Operating system version number and registration number. To display the operating system version number and registration number, select Start > Control Panel >
Performance and Maintenance icon > System icon >
General tab. Brand and model of an optional printer. 914 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM A Specifications The information in this appendix may be helpful if you plan to use or transport the notebook internationally or in extreme environments. Notebook Dimensions Dimension U.S. Height Width Depth 1.24 inches 14.06 inches 10 inches Operating Environment Metric 3.15 cm 35.7 cm 25.4 cm Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating U.S. Metric 50 to 95 F
-4 to 140 F 10 to 35 C
-20 to 60 C Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%
5% to 95%
Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating 10,000 ft 30,000 ft 10% to 90%
5% to 95%
3,048 m 9,144 m Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 A1 HP-323140-001.book Page 2 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Specifications Rated Input Power The notebook operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the notebook can be powered from a stand-alone DC power source, HP strongly recommends that the notebook be powered only with an AC adapter or DC cable supplied or approved by HP. An AC adapter provided by HP for use with this notebook is capable of accepting AC power within the following specifications:
Input Power Operating voltage Operating current Operating frequency range Rating 100240V AC @1.7A - 5060Hz 1.5A rms 50 to 60Hz The notebook is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications:
Input Power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5V DC @3.5A- 65W 4.9A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 Vrms. A2 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 3 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Specifications Finding More Environmental Information The specifications in this appendix contain information about exposing the notebook to environmental extremes. For similar information about storing battery packs, see the Storing a Battery Pack section in Chapter 4. For information about exposing the notebook to sunlight, ultraviolet light, x-rays, or magnetic fields, refer on the Documentation Library CD to the Maintenance, Shipping and Travel guide. Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 A3 HP-323140-001.book Page 4 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Specifications A4 Startup and Reference GuidePart 2 HP-323140-001.book Page 1 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Index B backup, system 97 battery bay identifying 213 inserting battery pack 13 removing battery pack 418 battery light 26 battery pack calibrating 414 causing CD or DVD write corruption 610 charging 12, 16, 411 inserting 13 monitoring charge 412 removing 418 storing 416 when to remove 43 battery power conserving 417 low-battery conditions 413 running notebook on 411 switching to and from 411 when to use 111, 44 BIOS (basic input output system) 92 boot order 510 1394 connector 29 A AC adapter 411 connecting 15, 411 disconnecting 411 identifying 217 power connector 212 AC power 112, 411 adapter AC 15, 217, 411 country-specific modem 217, 73, 75 Japan-specific outlet 217 Agere modem AT commands 79 airport security devices 53 altitude specifications A1 antivirus software 111 applications key 24 applications. See software;
software updates AT commands 218, 79 audio CD. See CD(s) audio-out jack connecting 64 identifying 28 AutoPlay 58 Startup and Reference Guide Index1 HP-323140-001.book Page 2 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Index button(s) PC Card eject 211, 85 power 25 TouchPad 23, 33 volume 27, 62 wireless device 28 See also key; latch; switch, display C cable AC adapter 15 audio 65 DC 212 modem 29, 216, 72 network 216, 711 S-Video 65 See also cord, power cable lock, connecting 815 calibration, battery 414 caps lock light 26 card and socket services, PC Card 84 card. See memory, modules supported; PC Card; SD Card CD drive. See drives CD(s) CD-R vs. CD-RW 610 copying 69 creating 69 playing, with Windows Media Player 67 playing, with WinDVD 67 starting from 510 See also drive media Certificate of Authenticity label 215, 99 commands, AT 218, 79 compartment, memory 213, 89 connector(s) 1394 29 docking 214 drive 53 external monitor 29 infrared port 212, 712 modem 29, 73 network 29, 710 parallel 29 power 212 USB 29, 82 conservation, power 417 cord, power connecting 15 identifying 216 surge protection 111 See also cable country-specific modem adapter connecting 75 identifying 217 when to use 73 critical low-battery condition 413 currency formats, setting 110 customer support 218, 913 D data compression algorithm 72 date, setting the 110 DC cable 18, 212 designation, drive 52 device drivers, reinstalling 910 dialing mode 77 Index2 Startup and Reference Guide HP-323140-001.book Page 3 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM dimensions, notebook A1 disc, diskette. See drive media display release latch 22 display switch 25 function, changing 49 function, default 46 identifying 45 display, internal brightness 37 opening 14 switching image 36 docking connector, cover 214 drive designation 52 drive media affected by airport security 53 cancelling AutoPlay on 58 caring for 53 displaying contents of 58 inserting, removing CD or DVD 55 types and terms 52 drivers, reinstalling 910 drives adding to system 54 affected by airport security 53 avoiding Standby and Hibernation while using optical 59 IDE drive light 54 inserting, removing media 55 shipping 53 starting from 510 types and terms 52 USB 82 See also hard drive, internal DVD drive. See drives Index DVD(s) playing, with WinDVD 67 region settings 68 starting from 510 See also drive media E Easy CD Creator CD Copier, when to use 69 DirectCD, when to use 69 features 69 formats 611 obtaining 69 preparing to use 610 prompt, UDF 610 settings 611 source drive vs. destination drive 610 eject button optical drive 56 PC Card 85 electric shock warning 112 electrical storm, safety issues 111 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 53, 810 emergency shutdown procedures 110, 46 enablers, PC Card 84 End User License Agreement 18 environmental specifications A1 error message No Dial Tone 78 Playback Of Content From This Region Not Permitted 67 ESD (electrostatic discharge) 53, 810 Startup and Reference Guide Index3 HP-323140-001.book Page 4 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Index exhaust vent 210 external monitor connecting 82 connector 29 switching image 36 F fan, vents 210, 214 FCC notice 112 FDD (floppy disk drive) 52 flash memory card 86 flash RAM card 86 Fn key changing Standby function 49 hotkeys function 34 identifying 24 keypad functions 39 Standby function 45 video device function 66 function keys 24, 34 H hard drive bay identifying 213 replacing hard drive 510 hard drive, internal defined 52 displaying amount of free space on 89 replacing 510 retaining screws 511, 514 space on, required for Hibernation file 89 See also drives headphones 64 Help and Support window 36, 913 Index4 Hibernation avoiding when playing media 59 changing configuration during 42 controls and indicators 45 defined 42 identifying 510 initiated during critical low-battery condition 413 initiating 25, 48 resuming from 48 setting preferences 49 when to use 42 hotkeys changing function of Fn+F5 49 identifying 34 procedures 35 Quick Reference 35 hotkeys commands access Help and Support 36 display brightness 37 initiate QuickLock 37 initiate Standby 36, 47 media commands 37 Open Internet Explorer 36 Quick Reference 35 switch image 36 hub, USB 82 humidity specifications A1 I IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) light 54 identifying components Startup and Reference Guide HP-323140-001.book Page 5 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM additional 216 display 22 IEC 60950 compliance 112 infrared port 212, 712 International Telecommunications Union (ITU) 72 InterVideo WinDVD error message 67 managing region settings 68 playing video CDs and DVDs 67 ITU (International Telecommunications Union) 72 J jack audio-out 28, 64 microphone 28, 64 RJ-11 29, 73 RJ-45 29, 711 S-Video 28, 29, 65 Japan-specific modem adapter 217 K key applications 24 Fn 24 function (F1, F2, etc.) 24 hotkeys 34 keypad 24, 38 Microsoft logo 24 num lock 39 See also button; latch; switch, display keyboard language 110 Index L label Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 215, 99 modem approvals 215 product identification 215 system 215 wireless certification 215 language choosing during setup 18 selecting keyboard 110 latch battery pack locking 419 battery pack release 213 display release 22 See also button; switch, display light battery 26 caps lock 26 IDE drive 54 num lock 39 power/standby 26 light(s) hard drive 26 mute 26 wireless device 26 line-out jack 28, 64 lock, security cable 815 locked system emergency shutdown procedures 110, 46 locking latches, battery pack 419 lock-up, system 25 low-battery conditions identifying 413 Startup and Reference Guide Index5 HP-323140-001.book Page 6 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Index Lucent modem AT commands 79 Lucent/Agere Command Set
(Advanced Users Only) guide 218 M Maintenance, Shipping and Travel guide 218 media hotkeys 37 Media Player, Windows 67 media, drive affected by airport security 53 cancelling AutoPlay on 58 caring for 53 displaying contents of 58 inserting, removing CD or DVD 55 types and terms 52 See also drives memory compartment 213 displaying amount of 89 increasing RAM 89 module, removing or inserting 810 modules supported 89 microphone jack 28 microphone, connecting 64, 82 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 215 Microsoft logo key 24 mode, dialing 77 model, identifying notebook 92 modem approvals label 215 cable 216 connecting 73 country configurations 76 country-specific adapter 217 Lucent/Agere Command Set
(Advanced Users Only) guide 218 Modem Command Guidelines
(Advanced Users Only) guide 218 specifications 72 speed 72 troubleshooting travel connections 77 virus protection 111 monitor, external connecting 82 external monitor connector 29 switching display 36 mouse, external connecting 82 USB connectors 29 multimedia card 86 N network cable 216 connecting 711 RJ-45 jack 29 specifications 710 speed 710 No Dial Tone error message 78 Norton AntiVirus 2003 111 notebook model, family, type, and serial number 92 NTSC television format 66 Index6 Startup and Reference Guide HP-323140-001.book Page 7 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM num lock key 39 light 26 number Product Key 215 serial 215 numeric keypad 38 O opening the notebook 14 Opens 22 operating environment specifications A1 operating system installing retail version of 911 loading 46 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 215 Product Key number 215 reinstalling 98 repairing 98 shutting down 46 optical disc. See CD(s); DVD(s) optical drive avoiding Standby and Hibernation while using 59 boot order 510 identifying 211 See also drives P PAL, PAL-M television formats 66 parallel connector 29 passwords 911 Index PC Card configuring 84 functions 83 inserting, removing 84 stopping 85 types available 83 PC Card eject button 211 pointing device 33 port, infrared 212, 712 power button 25 connecting the notebook to external 15 conservation 42, 417 controls 45 cord 216 emergency shutdown procedures 46 Hibernation procedures 46 low-battery conditions 413 power connector 212 power/standby light 26 rated input A2 setting preferences 49 shutting down the notebook 110 Standby procedures 47 surge protection 111 switching between AC and battery 411 turning on the notebook 17 See also battery pack power button function, changing 49 identifying 45 resetting with 46 Startup and Reference Guide Index7 HP-323140-001.book Page 8 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Index power connector connecting 15 identifying 212 power cord connecting 15 surge protection 111 Power Meter 412 power, AC 112 power/standby light 45 Preboot eXecution Environment
(PXE) 712 preloaded utilities displaying descriptions 19 Product Key number 215 projector connecting 29, 82 switching display 36 PXE (Preboot eXecution Environment) 712 R RAM (Random Access Memory) 89 recovery CD 218 region settings currency, date, language, time 110 DVD 68 modem 76 Regulatory and Safety Notices guide 218 regulatory information modem approvals label 215 notices 112 Regulatory and Safety Notices guide 218 system label 215 wireless certification label 215 release latch battery pack 213 display 22 repairing the operating system 98 reset (emergency shutdown procedures) 110, 46 resolution, screen 110 restoring software 218 RJ-11 telephone jack connecting 73 identifying 29 modem cable 216 RJ-45 network jack connecting 711 identifying 29 network cable 216 ROM defined 92 determining current version of 93 downloading and installing 94 obtaining updates 94 RomPaq, downloading 94 S Safety & Comfort Guide 112, 218 SD Card inserting, removing 86 security cable lock, connecting 815 slot 212 serial number, notebook 215, 92 Index8 Startup and Reference Guide HP-323140-001.book Page 9 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM series, notebook 92 Setup utility 911 shutdown procedures 110, 46 sleep button 37, 49 Sleep. See Standby slot memory 89 PC Card 211 SD Card 86 security cable 212 socket services, PC Card 84 SoftPaq described 94 downloading and installing 96 software antivirus protection 111 AutoPlay 58 Easy CD Creator 69 Help and Support window 913 infrared 712 installing optional 19 modem 76 network 712 Norton AntiVirus 2003 111 Power Meter 412 regional settings 110 reinstalling 98, 910 repairing 98 restoring 218 RomPaq 94 Setup utility 911 SoftPaq 94 UDF Reader 610 Index updating preloaded software 92 Windows Media Player 67 WinDVD 67 software updates downloading and installing 94, 96 obtaining 94 preparing for 92 speakers, external 64 speakers, internal 63 specifications dimensions A1 modem 72 network 710 operating environment A1 rated input power A2 Standby avoiding when playing media 59 avoiding when using infrared 714 controls and indicators 45 initiated during critical low-battery condition 413 initiating 36, 47 power/standby light 26 resuming from 47 setting preferences 49 S-Video connections 65 jack 29 switch, display 25 system label 215 Startup and Reference Guide Index9 HP-323140-001.book Page 10 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Index T technical support 913 notebook documentation 218 telephone (RJ-11) jack connecting 73 identifying 29 modem cable 216 telephone numbers, service and support 913 television changing color format 66 connecting audio 64 connecting video 65 temperature notebook surface 112 specifications A1 storage, battery pack 416 1394 connector 29 time, settting the 110 TouchPad components 33 setting preferences 33 traveling with notebook battery pack temperature considerations 416 environmental specifications A1 modem approvals label 215 serial number 215 wireless certification label 215 traveling with the notebook modem country configurations 76 regional settings 110 troubleshooting modem travel connections 77 Troubleshooting guide 218 turning off notebook 110, 46 turning on notebook 17, 46 U UDF Reader 610 unresponsive system, emergency shutdown procedures 110, 46 USB connectors, identifying 29 devices, connecting 82 utilities, preloaded displaying descriptions 19 installing 19 See also software V VCR audio-out jack function 64 connecting 65 vents, fan 210, 214 video CDs, DVDs. See CD(s);
DVD(s) video device connecting audio 65 S-Video jack 65 turning on and off 66 Index10 Startup and Reference Guide HP-323140-001.book Page 11 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Index viruses, computer 111 volume, adjusting 62 W Windows applications key 24 Windows Media Player accessing with Digital Audio button 67 using with audio CDs WinDVD error message 67 managing region settings 68 playing video CDs and DVDs 67 wireless device button 28 certification label 215 Startup and Reference Guide Index11 HP-323140-001.book Page 12 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM Index Index12 Startup and Reference Guide HP-323140-001.book Page 14 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM 2003 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Intel, Centrino, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. SD Logo is a trademark. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. The information in this document is provided as is without warranty of any kind, and is subject to change without notice. The warranties for HP products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements accompanying such products. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. Startup and Reference Guide HP Compaq Notebook Series First Edition June 2003 Reference Number: nx7000 Document Part Number: 323140-001 HP-323140-001.book Page 13 Tuesday, April 1, 2003 4:20 PM
1 2 3 4 5 6 | User Guide Part 5 | Users Manual | 754.97 KiB | December 08 2003 |
Contents: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Introduction Completing the Setup Utility Functions Specifications Regulatory Information Troubleshooting Glossary Company Copyright Statement Company Trademark Statement. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks owned by Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. WLCARD-UG200-D2 01.30.03 file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/index.htm [1/30/03 10:11:15 PM]
Introduction: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Introduction: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual The Company 54g WLAN Solution Using the Company 54g WLAN Features and Requirements The Company 54g WLAN Solution The Company 54g WLAN solution accesses wireless local area networks (LANs), enables the sharing of a local printer and files with others in the network, accesses the Internet, and enables roaming about the officewire-free. This wireless LAN solution is designed for both the home user and small businessesand it is scalable so that users can be added and new network features can be enabled as networking needs grow. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in IEEE Std 802.11, 1999 Edition) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network being connecting to has enabled WEP, WEP must also be enabled in the network profile and the WEP key must be set to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, it is impossible to connect to the network. The Company 54g enabled notebook makes a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated on the following figure. Networks 1 and 2 are infrastructure type of networks. The two notebook computers connected by radio waves form an ad hoc type of network. Enterprise Users file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (1 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]
Introduction: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Obtain the following information from the network administrator:
l Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks to connect to l WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks to connect to l For Microsoft Windows networking, the customer name and workgroup name l For a network account, a user name and password l An IP address (if not using a DHCP server) Home Users The access point (AP) that communicates with the Company 54g enabled notebook has a preassigned network name
(SSID) that the notebook recognizes upon startup. To enable WEP, use any string of numbers for the WEP key. Upon startup, the Company 54g enabled notebook detects certain wireless networks (WLANs) that are within range. Before connecting to these and other wireless networks, configure a profile for each network.See Completing the setup. Using the Company 54g WLAN The Company 54g enabled notebook is an IEEE 802.11g based wireless LAN device. A LAN is composed of two or more computers that are connected to each other to share files or common equipment such as a printer or an Internet connection. A wireless LAN provides the same functionality of a wired network, but it eliminates the need to install networking cables and other networking equipment. Not only is a wireless LAN easier to deploy, but it also allows for roaming. For example, when using the Company 54g enabled notebook, it is possible to roam from a conference room to an office without being disconnected from the network. Features and Requirements An IEEE 802.11 based wireless LAN includes the following features:
l Support for IEEE 802.11g draft specification l Support for IEEE 802.11b standard l 2.4-GHz band operation l Network data rate of up to 54 Mbit/s l Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption The following items are needed for participating in a wireless LAN:
l Company 54g enabled notebook computer running on a Microsoft Windows XP operating system l Software compact disc containing the drivers, software reference guide, and Help file The Company 54g enabled notebook works with any Wi-Fi CERTIFIED base station or wireless client adapter. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (2 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]
Introduction: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to top Back to Contents Ccopyright and Trademark Information. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (3 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual NOTEBefore starting, obtain the required network information from the network administrator or the wireless access point installer (see The Company 54g WLAN Solution in Introduction). Modes of Operation Configuring a Network Profile Modes of Operation A wireless LAN can be configured for two different modes of operation: infrastructure network and computer-to-computer
(ad hoc) network. Whereas each mode has its advantages, one mode may be more appropriate than the other, depending on the location and type of network connection. Infrastructure Mode The key difference between the infrastructure type of network and an ad hoc network is that the infrastructure network includes a base station (host) computer that has a built-in wireless network adapter and is connected to a wireless access point (AP). This functionality allows computers on the infrastructure wireless LAN to access the resources and tools of the wired LAN, including Internet access, e-mail, file transfers, and printer sharing. Characteristics Networked computers communicate with each other through a dedicated AP. All data transmitted between the computers on this wireless LAN passes through the AP. Advantages l Extended range. The access point extends the range of the wireless LAN. Each computer can communicate with other computers equipped by wireless networks that are within the range of the access point. l Roaming. As the user moves around the home or office, the Company 54g enabled notebook determines the best access point to use to ensure continuous communication with the network. l Network connectivity. An access point can provide wireless LAN access to an existing wired network by bridging the two networks together. This gives users of the wireless LAN access to all the functions of a wired networkfrom file server access to e-mail and the Internet. Disadvantages Because the infrastructure mode offers more features, it requires additional components and setup time to deploy. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (1 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Requirements A base station computer having a wired connection to the Internet, a wireless network adapter, and a connection to an AP. Computer-to-Computer Mode A peer-to-peer (ad hoc) network is the easiest to deploy and is ideal for home use or in small offices. This mode allows the sharing of files with other employees, printing to a shared office printer, and access to the Internet through a shared modem. With ad hoc networking, however, the computer is only able to communicate with other wireless networks that are within a certain range and are in the same wireless workgroup. Characteristics Networked computers send data directly to each other. Advantages l Simple setup l Cost efficiency Disadvantages Communication is limited to those who are located within a certain range. Configuring a Network Profile To connect to a wireless network, a network profile for that network must be configured on the Company 54g enabled notebook. If the Company 54g enabled notebook computer came with the Company 54g WLAN card already installed and set up at the factory, follow the network profile configuration instructions provided below. NOTEFor more information on how to configure a network profile and IEEE 802.1x authentication, click Learn about setting up wireless network configuration at the bottom of the Wireless Networks tab of Wireless Network Connection Properties. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection you want to configure by doing the following. 1. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (2 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Click the Wireless Networks tab. You can configure a network profile for networks that are listed under Available networks as well as those that are not listed. When you have completed configuring a network profile, the network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. The computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list. Follow the applicable instruction set below, based on whether or not the network is listed and whether or not the network requires a WEP key (check with your network administrator to see if a WEP key is required). NOTEBoth the network name and the network key are case-sensitive. l Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key l Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP key l Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key l Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (3 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (4 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (5 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 5. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (6 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (7 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 5. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 6. Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 7. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (8 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 8. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (9 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (10 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 5. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (11 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 6. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that network. If the Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (12 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (13 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box and again in the Confirm network key box. 5. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 6. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 7. Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 8. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (14 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 9. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Back to top Back to Contents Copyright and Trademark Information. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (15 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Running Utility Functions Adding a New Network to the List of Preferred Networks Viewing or Modifying the Wireless Network Properties Setting Up an Ad Hoc (Peer-to-Peer) Group Network for Connecting to the Internet Adding an Ad Hoc Network Disabling the Radio Running Utility Functions The utility functions and details for the wireless network connection are available in Control Panel. These functions include Disabling the network device, Renaming the connection, View status of this connection, and Change settings of this connection. Changing Settings 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Click Wireless Network Connections, and then click Change settings of this connection. l Click the Wireless Network tab to configure available networks, add and remove networks, and change network properties. l Click the General tab, then click Configure m To change the properties of the network adapter, click the Advanced tab. m To view details about the driver files, update the driver for the device, roll back to the previous driver, or to uninstall the driver, click the Driver tab. m To view resource settings, click the Resources tab. m To change power management settings, click the Power Management tab. The Advanced tab in Network Adapter Properties lists the properties for the Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) adapter. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (1 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual l IBSS Channel Number selects the independent basic service set (IBSS) channel number on which to operate. The Company 54g enabled notebook comes preset for use on channels 111. This setting is acceptable in most countries. Some countries allow use on more channels. If you travel to a country that allows the use of other channels, change the IBSS Channel Number to that number. l Locale selects the adapter properties that comply with the operating regulations for that locale. The Locale settings include USA, Israel, Japan, Jordan, Thailand, and Worldwide. This wireless LAN device is normally preset by default for the country in which the device is sold. Before operating this WLAN device, verify that the locale selection is correct by following the steps described in Changing Settings above. On the Advanced tab of HP WLAN 54g W450 Network Adapter Properties, m Click Locale m In the Value list, select the appropriate regional location If you travel to other countries with the Company 54g enabled notebook, follow the same steps to change the locale setting to match the destination country. Reset the locale setting back to the appropriate home setting after returning. If the destination country is not listed, change the Locale setting to Worldwide. l Radio Enable/Disable allows you to turn the radio on or off as necessary to comply with restrictions prohibiting the emission of radio signals, such as during takeoff and landing onboard a commercial aircraft. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (2 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual l Rate sets the transmission rate. The default setting is Use best rate. This automatically adjusts the data rate to the optimal rate based on the capabilities of the other clients and access points. The default values for the properties listed below are set for maximum performance. Therefore, It is not recommended for home users to change the settings for any of these properties. Only network administrators or persons having technical wireless LAN experience should attempt to change any of the settings. frames. available:
adapter. l Fragmentation Threshold is the threshold at which the IEEE 802.11 adapter break the packet into multiple l IBSS 54g (TM) Mode is used to set the connection type in an ad hoc network. The following options are m 54g - 802.11b compatible links at the best rate with an IEEE 802.11b and an IEEE 802.11g network m 54g - Performance links only with IEEE 802.11g networks at the highest rate. In addition it excludes m 802.11b Mode links only with IEEE 802.11b networks at the highest rate. In addition it excludes IEEE
(recommended setting). IEEE 802.11b networks. 802.11g networks. l Locally Administered MAC Address is used to override the MAC address of the Company 54g Wireless LAN l PLCP Header is used to set the header type used for CCK rates. Can be long, auto (short/long). l Power Output is used for putting out a percentage of the maximum output power. l Power Save Mode is used to put the Company 54g enabled notebook into the IEEE 802.11 Power Save mode. In Power Save mode, the radio is periodically powered down to conserve power. When in Power Save mode, packets are stored in the AP until the STA comes on. Adding a New Network to the List of Preferred Networks If the Company 54g enabled notebook is running at a location in which a wireless LAN is operating, and it is within range of the access point, the computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list under Preferred networks. A network profile must be configured for each network to add to the list To add a new network to the list of preferred networks, first check to see if the new network is listed on the Wireless Networks tab under Available networks. If it is, follow the applicable instructions below according to which operating system your computer is running and whether or not the network requires a WEP key. NOTESee the network administrator or the wireless access point installer to obtain a WEP key, as necessary. l See Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key in Completing the Setup l See Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key in Completing the Setup. If the network being added to the Preferred networks list is not listed in the Available networks list, follow the applicable instructions below according to which operating system the computer is running and whether or not the network requires a WEP key. l See Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key in Completing the Setup l See Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key in Completing the Setup. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (3 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Viewing or Modifying the Wireless Network Properties 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 4. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. 5. Under Preferred networks click the network name and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (4 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual It is possible to enable or disable WEP data encryption and change the network name and the network key (see Completing the setup for instructions). Setting Up an Ad Hoc (Peer-to-Peer) Group Network for Connecting to the Internet To connect the computers in an ad hoc group network to the Internet, the Windows Internet connection sharing (ICS) component must be installed. ICS installation is not required, however, for communication among a group of computers that have a Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) installed in each computer. An ad hoc network must be added under Preferred networks. See Running Utility Functions. Select a desktop computer to serve as the host computer; all other computers are called clients. The host computer must be running the Windows XP operating system. The host computer is the only computer that connects directly to the Internet. Company recommends using the desktop computer having the fastest microprocessor and the most memory as the host computer. NOTEInternet connection sharing requires that the host computer have either a modem or another network adapter in addition to a wireless network adapter. The modem or the additional network adapter is used to access the Internet. The file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (5 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Company 54g enabled notebook is used to share the Internet connections with other clients. Setting Up Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) on the Host Computer 1. Connect the host computer to the Internet. 2. From the host computer Start menu, select Help and Support. 3. Perform a search on Internet Connection Sharing. 4. From the Pick a task list, select Enable Internet Connection Sharing on a Network Connection. 5. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete setting up ICS
. Adding an Ad Hoc Network An ad hoc network (for peer-to-peer communicating) can either require a WEP key or not. Instructions for adding and configuring an ad hoc network for both types of ad hoc networks are provided below:
l Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key l Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Requires a WEP Key Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (6 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (7 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 5. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 6. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used box. 7. Clear the Data encryption (WEP enabled) and the The Key is provided for me automatically boxes if they are selected. 8. Click OK. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (8 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 9. Click Advanced. 10. Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only, and click Close. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (9 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 11. Click OK. The added ad hoc network appears at the top of the list under Preferred networks. 12. To verify that the computer is connected to the added ad hoc network, reopen the Network Properties window and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the added network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for the ad hoc network. Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Requires a WEP Key 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (10 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. 5. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (11 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 6. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 7. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box and again in the Confirm network key box. 8. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 9. Type the network key in the Network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 10. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used box. 11. Click OK. 12. Click Advanced file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (12 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 13. Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only, and click Close. 14. Click OK. The added ad hoc network appears at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (13 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]
Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 15. To verify that the computer is connected to the added ad hoc network, reopen the Network Properties window and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the added network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for that network. Disabling the Radio l To disable the radio on the Company 54g enabled notebook, right-click the wireless network connection icon in the system tray and click Disable. Back to top Back to Contents Copyright and Trademark Information file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (14 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]
Specifications: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Specifications: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Physical Characteristics Temperature and Humidity Limitations Power Characteristics Networking Characteristics Radio Characteristics Physical Characteristics Characteristic Form Factor Description Mini PCI specification, May 2002. Type IIIA form factor Dimensions (length, width) 59.6 mm 50.95 mm Temperature and Humidity Limitations Condition Description Operating Temperature 0 to 70C Operating Humidity 95% maximum (no condensation allowed) Storage Temperature 40 to 90C Storage Humidity 95% maximum (no condensation allowed) Power Characteristics Characteristic IEEE 802.11g Operation IEEE 802.11b Operation Values Doze Mode 40 mA Receive Mode 400 mA Transmit Mode 600 mA Power Supply 3.3 V 40 mA 220 mA 330 mA 3.3 V file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/specs.htm (1 of 2) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]
Specifications: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Networking Characteristics Characteristic Compatibility Description IEEE Std 802.11b and IEEE Draft Std 802.11g for wireless LAN Network Operating System Microsoft Windows Networking Host Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Medium Access Protocol CSMA/CA (collision avoidance) with acknowledgment (ACK) Data rate (Mbps) IEEE Draft Std 802.11g: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 IEEE Std 802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 NOTEThe Company 54g WLAN solution uses an automatic transmit rate select mechanism Radio Characteristics Characteristic Frequency Band Description 2.4 GHz (IEEE 802.11b, IEEE Draft Std 802.11g) Modulation Technique Direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) l CCK for high and medium transmit rate l DQPSK for standard transmit rate l DBPSK for low transmit rate Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) l 52 subcarriers with BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM or 64-QAM l Forward error correction convolutional coding rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4 Spreading 11-chip Barker sequence Bit Error Rate (BER) Better than 10(5) ppm Nominal Output Power IEEE Std 802.11b: 14 dBm; IEEE Draft Std 802.11g: 15 dBm NOTESee Regulatory Information for country-specific performance characteristics and use restrictions. Back to top Back to Contents file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/specs.htm (2 of 2) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]
Copyright and Trademark Information Back to Contents Regulatory Information Operational Information Regulatory Information Operational Information Wireless Interoperability The Integrated 54g enabled notebook is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) and orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:
l IEEE Std 802.11b-1999. Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN l IEEE Std 802.11g-2002. Draft standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN Safety The Integrated 54g enabled notebook, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this devices, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Integrated 54g enabled notebook operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of a Integrated 54g enabled notebook may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:
l Using the Integrated 54g enabled notebook onboard airplanes, or l Using the Integrated 54g enabled notebook in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airplane, for example), ask for authorization to use the Integrated 54g enabled notebook before turning it on. Regulatory Information The Integrated 54g enabled notebook must be used in strict accordance with this manual. For country-specific approvals, see Radio approvals. Hewlett-Packard is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this Integrated 54g enabled notebook kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Hewlett-Packard. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution, or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Hewlett-Packard and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user's failing to comply with these guidelines. CanadaIndustry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. Cet quipement est conforme aux principales caractristiques dfinies dans la Directive europenne RTTE 1999/5/CE. Die Gerte erfllen die grundlegenden Anforderungen der RTTE-Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. Questa apparecchiatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali della Direttiva Europea R&TTE 1999/5/CE. Este equipo cumple los requisitos principales de la Directiva 1999/5/CE de la UE, "Equipos de Terminales de Radio y Telecomunicaciones". Este equipamento cumpre os requisitos essenciais da Directiva 1999/5/CE do Parlamento Europeu e do Conselho (Directiva RTT). Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de noodzakelijke vereisten van EU-richtlijn betreffende radioapparatuur en telecommunicatie-
eindapparatuur 1999/5/EG. Dette udstyr opfylder de Vsentlige krav i EU's direktiv 1999/5/EC om Radio- og teleterminaludstyr. Dette utstyret er i overensstemmelse med hovedkravene i R&TTE-direktivet (1999/5/EC) fra EU. Utrustningen uppfyller kraven fr EU-direktivet 1999/5/EC om ansluten teleutrustning och msesidigt erknnande av utrustningens verensstmmelse (R&TTE). Tm laite vastaa EU:n radio- ja teleptelaitedirektiivin (EU R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC) vaatimuksia. This product is intended to be used in all countries of the European Economic Area when operating in IEEE 802.11b and/or IEEE draft 802.11g mode at 2.4 GHz (see France below). France Some areas of France have a restricted frequency band for operation in the IEEE 802.11b mode and IEEE draft 802.11g mode at 2.4 GHz. The following information describes this restriction (please check ART's Web site (http://www.art-telecom.fr) for more up-
to-date information). Autorit de rgulation des tlecommunications (ART) has made decisions that will allow users to install WLAN ( wireless LAN) systems to provide high-speed Internet services primarily in high-traffic areas (called hot spots). ART recently released guidelines that establish the conditions for experimenting with the installation of public WLANs, such as for high-speed Internet access in locations that are currently being poorly served by existing networks. Such public WLANs would operate in the 2.4-GHz frequency band. This series of measures answers many of the concerns expressed during Art's public consultation on this topic. Decisions allowing the installation of wireless terminals in hot spots (train stations, airports, business centers, and the like): In agreement with the Ministry of Defense, ART has made two decisions setting the conditions for using wireless LANs in the 2.4-
GHz band. One of these decisions has been submitted to the Minister of Telecommunications for approval. These decisions will allow the installation of WLAN access points to provide public services in high-traffic public places. This will allow service providers and licensed operators to install access points using 2.4 GHz band technologies without authorization, under the following technical conditions:
1. In 38 dpartements (see Metropolitan Dpartements for listing):
l The 24002454 MHz band can be used both indoors and outdoors using systems (access points and devices) with less than 300 milliwatts (mW) of power. l The 24542483.5 MHz band can be used indoors using devices with less than 100 mW of power and can be used outdoors using devices with less than 10 mW of power. When the devices are being used outdoors on private property, the power may be increased to 100 mW after approval from the Ministry of Defense. 2. For the time being, in all other metropolitan dpartements, the conditions remain unchanged. The list of the first 38 dpartements will be progressively added to after 1 January 2003. 3. For the overseas dpartements (DOM), as well as Saint Pierre and Miquelon and Mayotte, the entire 24002483.5 MHz band may be used indoors and outdoors using devices with less than 100 mW of power, except for the Reunion Islands and Guyana, where the 24202483.5 MHz band may be used only outdoors using devices with less than 100 mW of power. ART reminds operators that these frequencies are used with no guarantee of nondisruption, and that the installations must respect all measures applying to radio installations (such as urban planning regulations). These decisions also allow the development of private uses. In particular, private networks (such as indoor corporate networks) can be established using these technologies. These conditions are tabulated below in Table of Authorized EIRP. Guidelines for Public WLAN Experimentation l Networks using WLAN technology will be granted a free authorization for up to 18 months under article L.33-1 of the Post and Telecommunications Code. These networks may use systems with 100 mW of power (effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP)) on the entire band, indoors and outdoors. Moreover, in the 2.4 GHz band (and providing this power limit is respected), fixed point-to-point links can be established for these networks needs, or frequencies can be requested in other ad hoc bands. l Private and public persons may submit applications to ART, provided that legislation and regulations allow them to do so. l Applications will be processed in a simplified way, in the spirit of the new "Authorization" Directive. l ART will send completed applications to the Ministry of Defense. The Ministry will then check that the projects are not located near any sensitive area and that they are not likely to cause disruptions to military equipment. For each application, ART will then submit its report and the draft authorization to the Minister of Telecommunications. l Applications can be sent from 12 November 2002 so that the first experiments may be launched as soon as early 2003. Full reviews are to be sent to ART at the end of the temporary authorizations to determine whether the technology guarantees quality and security to users. Metropolitan Departments The table below lists the 38 metropolitan dpartements that permit the use of WLAN systems using less than 100 mW of power
(EIRP) indoors across the entire 24002483.5 MHz band and outdoors on the 24002454 MHz band:
01 Ain Orientales 02 Aisne 03 Allier 36 37 41 Indre 66 Pyrnes Indre et Loire 67 Bas Rhin Loir et Cher 68 Haut Rhin 05 Hautes Alpes 08 Ardennes 09 Arige 11 Aude 42 45 Loire Loiret 50 Manche 55 Meuse 12 Aveyron 58 Nivre 16 Charente 59 Nord 24 Dordogne 60 Oise 70 Haute Sane 71 Sane et Loire 75 Paris 82 Tarn et Garonne 84 Vaucluse 88 Vosges 89 Yonne 25 Doubs 26 Drme 32 Gers 61 Orne 90 Territoire de Belfort 63 Puy du Dme 94 Val de Marne 64 Pyrnes Atlantique Conditions of use for WLANs in hot spots in these 38 dpartements:
l The 24002454 MHz band may be used both indoors and outdoors using devices with power (EIRP) of less than 100 milliwatts (mW). l The 24542483.5 MHz band may be used indoors using devices with power (EIRP) of less than 100 mW and outdoors using devices with power of less than 10 mW. On private property outdoors, the power may be 100 mW with the approval of the Minister of Defense. Conditions of use for WLANs in hot spots in other metropolitan dpartements: The conditions of use currently remain unchanged, that is, l The 24002446.5 MHz band may be used indoors using devices with power (EIRP) of less than 10 mW. l The 2446.52483.5 MHz band may be used indoors using devices with power (EIRP) of less than 100 mW. On private property outdoors, the power may be 100 mW with the approval of the Minister of Defence. Table of Authorised EIRP In the 38 Dpartements Authorized EIRP (mW) Frequency (MHz) Indoors Outdoors: Decisions
(Concernent les rseaux indpendants et les hot spots) Outdoors: Guidelines
(Concernent les xperimentations de rseaux ouverts au public) 2400 2454 2483.5 100 100 100 10 and 100 on private property with Ministry of Defense approval 100 with Ministry of Defense approval In Other Metropolitan Dpartements Authorized EIRP (mW) Frequency (MHz) Indoors Outdoors: Decisions
(Concernent les rseaux indpendants et les hot spots) Outdoors: Guidelines
(Concernent les xperimentations de rseaux ouverts au public) 100 with Ministry of Defense approval 2400 2446.5 2483.5 10 Not permitted 100 100 on private property with Ministry of Defense approval In Guadeloupe, Martinique, St. Pierre, and Miquelon and Mayotte Authorized EIRP (mW) Frequency (MHz) Indoors Outdoors: Decisions and Guidelines 2400 2483.5 100 100 In Reunion Islands and Guyana Authorized EIRP (mW) Frequency (MHz) Indoors Outdoors: Decisions
(Concernent les rseaux indpendants et les hot spots) Outdoors: Guidelines
(Concernent les xperimentations de rseaux ouverts au public) 2400 2420 2483.5 Not permitted 100 100 100 with Ministry of Defense approval 100 NOTEThe Integrated 54g enabled notebook transmits less than 100 mW of power, but more than 10 mW. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) ThIs device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:
l The device may not cause harmful interference. l The device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTEThe radiated output power of the Integrated 54g enabled notebook is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Integrated 54g enabled notebook should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, keep a distance of at least 0.5 cm between the user (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the computer. To determine the location of the antenna within the notebook, refer to the operating manual for the Integrated 54g enabled notebook. Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:
l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. l Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. l Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTEThis Integrated 54g enabled notebook must be used in strict accordance with your computer manufacturer's instructions. Any other installation or use violates FCC Part 15 regulations. Modifications not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Radio Approvals Only use this radio device in countries where the device is approved for use. Back to the top Back to Contents Troubleshooting: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Troubleshooting: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Cannot Connect to the Network Performance and Connectivity Problems Getting Help Cannot Connect to the Network If the Company 54g enabled notebook appears to be functioning properly but does not connect to the network, the problem may be that there is a mismatch between the Network name (SSID) and Wireless network key (WEP) settings in the Wireless Network Properties and the name and WEP key of the network it is trying to connect to. As explained in Completing the Setup, the network name and WEP key are case sensitive. Verify that the spelling and case of these parameters are correct and that the settings are exactly the same on all computers on the network. If the spelling and case of these parameters are correct and the settings are exactly the same on all computers on the network, and the computer is still unable to connect to the network, see Performance and Connectivity Problems. Performance and Connectivity Problems Problem or Symptom The computers seem to be communicating, but they do not appear in My Computer or in My Network Places. Possible Solution Verify that File and Printer Sharing is enabled on all the computers on the network. 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel (if in Category View, click Switch to Classic View). 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. 4. On the General tab, under This connection uses the following items, verify that the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks check box is selected. If the check box is cleared, select it. If this item is not present, click Install. In the Select Network Component Type box, select Service and click Add. In the Select Network Service box, select File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks and click OK. In Wireless Network Connection Properties, click OK. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/trouble.htm (1 of 2) [1/30/03 10:11:22 PM]
Troubleshooting: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Data transfer is sometimes very slow. Data transfer is always very slow. Computers are not communicating with the network. Microwave ovens and some cordless phones operate at the same radio frequency as the Company 54g enabled notebook. When the microwave oven or cordless phone is in use, it interferes with the operation of the wireless network. Therefore, keep the Company 54g enabled notebook at least 20 feet away from microwave ovens and any cordless telephone that operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. Some homes and most offices are steel-framed structures. The steel in such buildings may interfere with the network's radio signals, thus causing a slowdown in the data transmission rate. Try moving the Company 54g enabled notebook to different locations in the building to see if performance improves. If the network has an access point (AP), check all of the cables and make sure the power LED on the front of the AP is green. Verify that all of the wireless network properties settings are correct (see Viewing or Modifying the Wireless Network Properties). Also, make sure the computer is receiving a good signal from the access point. Getting Help Technical support is available online on Company Web site. Back to top Back to Contents Copyright and Trademark Information file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/trouble.htm (2 of 2) [1/30/03 10:11:22 PM]
Glossary: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Glossary: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual access point A stand-alone wireless hub that allows any computer that has a wireless network adapter to communicate with another computer and to connect to the Internet. ad hoc (also known as computer-
to-computer network) A communication configuration in which every computer has the same capabilities and any computer can initiate a communication session. available network BER client computer dBm DBPSK DQPSK DSSS One of the networks listed under Wireless Network Connection Properties. Any wireless network that is broadcasting and is within receiving range of the Company 54g enabled notebook appears on the list. Bit error rate. The ratio of errors to the total number of bits being sent in a data transmission from one location to another. The computer that gets its Internet connection by sharing either the host computer's connection or the access point's connection. A unit of expression of power level in decibels with reference to a power of 1 milliwatt. differential-binary-phase-shift keying. differential-quadrature-phase-shift keying. A compression technique that transmits only the differences between the values of the phase of the sine wave rather than the full absolute value. direct sequence spread spectrum. A type of radio technology used in wireless local area networks. DSSS operates by spreading a signal over a wide range of the 2.4-GHz band. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) A mechanism for allocating IP addresses dynamically so that addresses can be reused when hosts no longer need them. file and printer sharing A capability that allows a number of people to view, modify, and print the same file(s) from different computers. GHz host computer IEEE gigahertz. A unit of frequency equal to 1 000 000 000 cycles per second. The computer that is directly connected to the Internet via a modem or network adapter. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineering Internet Protocol (IP) address The address of a computer that is attached to a network. Part of the address designates which network the computer is on, and the other part represents the host identification. LAN m MHz Mbps ns local area network meter megahertz. A unit of frequency equal to 1 000 000 cycles per second. megabits per second. Transmission speed of 1 000 000 bits per second. nanosecond. 1 billionth (1/1 000 000 000) of a second. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/glossary.htm (1 of 2) [1/30/03 10:11:22 PM]
Glossary: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual OFDM preferred network Service Set Identifier (SSID) Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) orthogonal frequency division multiplexing. A method of digital modulation in which a signal is split into several narrowband channels at different frequencies. OFDM is used in European digital audio broadcast services. One of the networks that has been configured. Such networks appear under Preferred networks on the Wireless Networks tab of Wireless Network Connection Properties. A value that controls access to a wireless network. The SSID for your wireless network card must match the SSID (network name) for any access point that you want to connect with. If the value does not match, you are not granted access to the network. You can have up to three SSIDs. Each SSID can be up to 32 characters long and is case-sensitive. A form of data encryption for WLAN security. The WEP key information in the client computer must match the WEP key used by the access point or host computer. The WEP key can be enabled or disabled. The WEP key is case-
sensitive. Back to top Back to Contents Copyright and Trademark Information file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/glossary.htm (2 of 2) [1/30/03 10:11:22 PM]
1 2 3 4 5 6 | WLAN Guide CRVSA 02T1 75 and 90 | Users Manual | 519.58 KiB |
User Guide HP Integrated Wireless LAN 54g Network Adapter-Quick Start Document Part Number: xxxxxx-xxx Review Copy February 2003-Draft Review Copy TABLE OF CONTENTS Introduction ..........................................................................................................................1 The Integrated 54g Solution........................................................................................................................ 1 Enterprise Users ..................................................................................................................................... 1 Home Users ............................................................................................................................................ 2 Using the Integrated 54g Enabled Notebook............................................................................................. 2 Features and Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 2 Completing the Setup..........................................................................................................3 Modes of Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 3 Infrastructure Mode................................................................................................................................. 3 Characteristics ................................................................................................................................. 3 Advantages...................................................................................................................................... 3 Disadvantages ................................................................................................................................. 3 Requirements .................................................................................................................................. 3 Ad Hoc Mode .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Characteristics ................................................................................................................................. 4 Advantages...................................................................................................................................... 4 Disadvantages ................................................................................................................................. 4 Requirements .................................................................................................................................. 4 Review Copy Configuring a Network Profile..................................................................................................................... 4 Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key ..................................... 5 Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key.................................................... 7 Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key.................... 9 Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key ................................ 11 Specifications.....................................................................................................................14 Physical Characteristics............................................................................................................................ 14 Temperature and Humidity Limitations.................................................................................................... 14 Power Characteristics ............................................................................................................................... 14 Networking Characteristics....................................................................................................................... 14 Radio Characteristics ................................................................................................................................ 15 Regulatory Information .....................................................................................................16 Operational Information ............................................................................................................................ 16 User Guide Page i Wireless Interoperability ........................................................................................................................16 Safety ....................................................................................................................................................16 Regulatory Information ..............................................................................................................................16 CanadaIndustry Canada (IC).............................................................................................................16 EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity.................................................................................................17 France ...................................................................................................................................................17 Guidelines for Public WLAN Experimentation ................................................................................18 Metropolitan Departments ..............................................................................................................19 USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) ............................................................................20 Interference Statement...................................................................................................................21 Radio Approvals ....................................................................................................................................21 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................ 22 Cannot Connect to the Network ................................................................................................................22 Performance and Connectivity Problems ................................................................................................22 Glossary............................................................................................................................. 24 Review Copy Page ii User Guide Introduction THE INTEGRATED 54g SOLUTION The Integrated 54g solution accesses wireless local area networks (WLANs), enables the sharing of a local printer and files with others in the network, enables Internet connection sharing, and enables roaming about the officewire free. This wireless LAN solution is designed for both the home user and small businesses and it is scalable so that users can be added and new network features can be enabled as networking needs grow. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) protocol is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in IEEE Std 802.11, 1999 Edition) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network being connecting to has enabled WEP, WEP must also be enabled in the network profile and the WEP key in the computer must be set to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, it is impossible to connect to the network. The Integrated 54g enabled notebook makes a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated on the following figure. Upon startup, the Integrated 54g enabled notebook detects certain WLANs (wireless networks) that are within range. Before connecting to these and other wireless networks, a user must configure a profile for each network. See "Completing the Setup" on page 3. Networks 1 and 2 are infrastructure types of networks. The two notebook computers connected by radio waves form an ad hoc type of network. Review Copy Figure 1: Types of Networks ENTERPRISE USERS Obtain the following information from the network administrator:
Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks to connect to
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks to connect to
An IP address (if not using a DHCP server)
For Microsoft Windows networking, the customer name and workgroup name For a network account, a user name and password If any of the networks are connected to an authentication server User Guide Page 1 Introduction HOME USERS The AP (access point) that communicates with the Integrated 54g enabled notebook has a preassigned network name (SSID) that the notebook recognizes upon startup. To enable WEP, use any string of numbers for the WEP key. USING THE INTEGRATED 54g ENABLED NOTEBOOK FEATURES AND REQUIREMENTS The Integrated 54g enabled notebook is an IEEE 802.11g based wireless LAN device. A LAN is composed of two or more computers that are connected to each other to share files or common equipment such as a printer or an Internet connection. A wireless LAN provides the same functionality of a wired network, but it eliminates the need to install networking cables and other networking equipment. Not only is a wireless LAN easier to deploy, but it also allows for roaming. For example, when using the Integrated 54g enabled notebook, it is possible to roam from one room in the house to another, or from a conference room to an office without being disconnected from the network. The Integrated 54g solution is an IEEE 802.11 based wireless LAN that includes the following features:
Support for IEEE 802.11g draft specification
Support for IEEE 802.11b standard
Network data rate of up to 54 Mbit/s
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption 2.4-GHz band operation Review Copy The following items are needed for participating in a wireless LAN:
Integrated 54g enabled notebook computer running on a Microsoft Windows XP operating system
Software drivers, software reference guide, and Help file The Integrated 54g enabled notebook works with any IEEE 802.11b Wi-Fi CERTIFIED or IEEE 802.11g access point or wireless client network adapter. Page 2 User Guide Characteristics Advantages Completing the Setup NOTEBefore starting, obtain the required network information from the network administrator or the wireless access point installer (see The Integrated 54g Solution on page 1). MODES OF OPERATION A wireless LAN can be configured for two different modes of operation: infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode
(an ad hoc network is also known as a peer-to-peer network or a computer-to-computer network). Whereas each mode has its advantages, one mode may be more appropriate than the other, depending on the location and type of network connection. INFRASTRUCTURE MODE The key difference between the infrastructure type of network and an ad hoc network is that the infrastructure network includes a base station (host) computer that has a built-in wireless network adapter and is connected to a wireless access point (AP). This functionality allows computers on the infrastructure wireless LAN to access the resources and tools of the wired LAN, including Internet access, e-mail, file sharing, and printer sharing. Review Copy Networked computers communicate with each other through a dedicated AP. All data transmitted between the computers on this wireless LAN passes through the AP.
Extended range. The access point extends the range of the wireless LAN. Each computer can communicate with other computers equipped by wireless networks that are within the range of the access point.
Roaming. As the user moves around the home or office, the Integrated 54g enabled notebook determines the best access point to use to ensure continuous communication with the network.
Network connectivity. An access point can provide wireless LAN access to an existing wired network by bridging the two networks together. This gives users of the wireless LAN access to all the functions of a wired networkfrom file server access to access to e-mail and the Internet. Disadvantages Because the infrastructure mode offers more features, it requires additional components and setup time to deploy. Requirements
A base station computer having a wired connection to the Internet
A wireless network adapter
A connection to an AP (access point) User Guide Page 3 Completing the Setup AD HOC MODE An ad hoc network is the easiest to deploy and is ideal for home use or in small offices. This mode allows the sharing of files with other employees, printing to a shared office printer, and access to the Internet through a shared modem. With ad hoc networking, however, the computer is only able to communicate with other wireless networks that are within a certain range and are in the same wireless workgroup. Characteristics Networked computers send data directly to each other without the need of an access point. Advantages
Simple setup
Cost efficiency Disadvantages Requirements
Communication is limited to those who are located within a certain range.
IEEE 802.1x security is not available. There are no other equipment requirements for operating in the ad hoc mode besides 2 WLAN enabled notebooks or desktop PCs. Review Copy CONFIGURING A NETWORK PROFILE To connect to a wireless network, a network profile for that network must be configured on the Integrated 54g enabled notebook. If the Integrated 54g enabled notebook computer came with the Integrated 54g network adapter already installed and set up at the factory, follow the network profile configuration instructions provided below. NOTEFor more information on how to configure a network profile and IEEE 802.1x authentication, click Learn about setting up wireless network configuration on the Wireless Networks tab of Wireless Network Connection Properties. You can configure a network profile for networks that are listed under Available networks as well as those that are not listed. When you have completed configuring a network profile, the network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. The computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list. Follow the applicable instruction set below, based on whether or not the network is listed, whether or not the network requires a WEP key, and whether or not the network is connected to an authentication server (check with the network administrator to see if a WEP key is required and if the network is connected to an authentication server). NOTEBoth the network name and the network key are case-sensitive.
Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key on page 5 Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key on page 7 Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key on page 9 Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key on page 11 Page 4 User Guide Completing the Setup CONFIGURING A PROFILE FOR A LISTED NETWORK THAT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WEP KEY 1 Click Start, then click Control Panel (Category View). 2 3 4 Click Network and Internet Connections. Click Network Connections. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. Review Copy Click the Wireless Networks tab. 5 6 Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. User Guide Page 5 Completing the Setup 7 The default settings in Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 require IEEE 802.1x authentication. With IEEE 802.1x authentication enabled, connecting to a network requires a connection with an authentication server. If the network has no authentication server, the connection is disabled every 3 minutes. Therefore, when connecting to a network that has no authentication server, disable IEEE 802.1x authentication by doing the following (if the network does have an authentication server, ignore this step):
Click the Authentication tab.
Clear the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1x check box. 8 Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. Review Copy 9 Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. Page 6 User Guide Completing the Setup CONFIGURING A PROFILE FOR A LISTED NETWORK THAT REQUIRES A WEP KEY 1 Click Start, then click Control Panel (Category View). 2 Click Network and Internet Connections. 3 4 Click Network Connections. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. Review Copy Click the Wireless Networks tab. 5 6 Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. User Guide Page 7 Completing the Setup Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) check box. 7 8 Clear the The key is provided for me automatically check box. 9 Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 10 The default settings in Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 require IEEE 802.1x authentication. With IEEE 802.1x authentication enabled, connecting to a network requires a connection with an authentication server. If the network has no authentication server, the connection is disabled every 3 minutes. Therefore, when connecting to a network that has no authentication server, disable IEEE 802.1x authentication by doing the following (if the network does have an authentication server, ignore this step):
Click the Authentication tab.
Clear the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1x check box. 11 Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. Review Copy 12 Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. Page 8 User Guide Completing the Setup CONFIGURING A PROFILE FOR A NETWORK THAT IS NOT LISTED AND DOES NOT REQUIRE A WEP KEY 1 Click Start, then click Control Panel (Category View). 2 3 4 Click Network and Internet Connections. Click Network Connections. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. Review Copy Click the Wireless Networks tab. 5 6 Click Add. User Guide Page 9 Completing the Setup Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 7 8 The default settings in Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 require IEEE 802.1x authentication. With IEEE 802.1x authentication enabled, connecting to a network requires a connection with an authentication server. If the network has no authentication server, the connection is disabled every 3 minutes. Therefore, when connecting to a network that has no authentication server, disable IEEE 802.1x authentication by doing the following (if the network does have an authentication server, ignore this step):
Click the Authentication tab.
Clear the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1x check box. 9 Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. Review Copy Page 10 User Guide Completing the Setup 10 Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. CONFIGURING A PROFILE FOR A NETWORK THAT IS NOT LISTED AND REQUIRES A WEP KEY 1 Click Start, then click Control Panel (Category View). 2 3 Click Network and Internet Connections. Click Network Connections. 4 Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. Review Copy Click the Wireless Networks tab. Click Add. 5 6 User Guide Page 11 Completing the Setup Review Copy 7 Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) check box. 8 9 Clear the The key is provided for me automatically check box. 10 Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 11 The default settings in Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 require IEEE 802.1x authentication. With IEEE 802.1x authentication enabled, connecting to a network requires a connection with an authentication server. If the network has no authentication server, the connection is disabled every 3 minutes. Therefore, when connecting to a network that has no authentication server, disable IEEE 802.1x authentication by doing the following (if the network does have an authentication server, ignore this step):
Click the Authentication tab.
Clear the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1x check box. 12 Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. Page 12 User Guide 13 Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. Review Copy User Guide Page 13 Specifications Specifications PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS Characteristic Description Form Factor Dimensions (length, width) Mini PCI specification, May 2002. Type IIIA form factor 59.6 mm 50.95 mm TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY LIMITATIONS Condition Description POWER CHARACTERISTICS Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Characteristic Doze Mode Receive Mode Transmit Mode Power Supply Values 0 to 70C 95% maximum (no condensation allowed) 40 to 90C 95% maximum (no condensation allowed) Review Copy 40 mA 400 mA 600 mA 3.3 V IEEE 802.11g Operation 40 mA 220 mA 330 mA 3.3 V NETWORKING CHARACTERISTICS IEEE 802.11b Operation Characteristic Description Compatibility Network Operating System Host Operating System Medium Access Protocol Data Rate (Mbit/s)a IEEE Std 802.11b and IEEE Draft Std 802.11g for wireless LAN Microsoft Windows Networking Microsoft Windows XP CSMA/CA (collision avoidance) with acknowledgment (ACK)
IEEE Draft Std 802.11g: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 IEEE Std 802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 a The Integrated 54g solution uses an automated rate select mechanism Page 14 User Guide Specifications RADIO CHARACTERISTICS Characteristica Description Frequency Band Modulation Technique Spreading Bit Error Rate (BER) Nominal Output Power 2.4 GHz (IEEE 802.11b, IEEE Draft Std 802.11g) Direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS)
CCK for high and medium transmit rate
DQPSK for standard transmit rate
DBPSK for low transmit rate Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM)
52 subcarriers with BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM or 64-QAM
Forward error correction convolutional coding rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4 11-chip Barker sequence Better than 105 ppm
IEEE Std 802.11b: 14 dBm IEEE Draft Std 802.11g: 15 dBm a See "Regulatory Information" on page 16 for country-specific performance characteristics and use restrictions. Review Copy User Guide Page 15 Regulatory Information Regulatory Information OPERATIONAL INFORMATION WIRELESS INTEROPERABILITY The Integrated 54g enabled notebook is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) and orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:
IEEE Std 802.11b-1999. Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN IEEE Std 802.11g-2002. Draft standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN SAFETY The Integrated 54g enabled notebook, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this devices, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Integrated 54g enabled notebook operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of a Integrated 54g enabled notebook may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:
Using the Integrated 54g enabled notebook onboard airplanes, or
Using the Integrated 54g enabled notebook in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. Review Copy If uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment
(in an airplane, for example), ask for authorization to use the Integrated 54g enabled notebook before turning it on. REGULATORY INFORMATION The Integrated 54g enabled notebook must be used in strict accordance with this manual. For country-specific approvals, see Radio Approvals on page 21. The computer manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this Integrated 54g enabled notebook kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by the computer manufacturer. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution, or attachment is the responsibility of the user. The computer manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user's failing to comply with these guidelines. CANADAINDUSTRY CANADA (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. Page 16 User Guide EUROPEEU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Regulatory Information This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. Cet quipement est conforme aux principales caractristiques dfinies dans la Directive europenne RTTE 1999/5/CE. Die Gerte erfllen die grundlegenden Anforderungen der RTTE-Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. Questa apparecchiatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali della Direttiva Europea R&TTE 1999/5/CE. Este equipo cumple los requisitos principales de la Directiva 1999/5/CE de la UE, "Equipos de Terminales de Radio y Telecomunicaciones". Este equipamento cumpre os requisitos essenciais da Directiva 1999/5/CE do Parlamento Europeu e do Conselho (Directiva RTT). O exoplismos autos plhroi tis basikes apaits ths koinotikhs odhgias EU R&TTE 1999/5/E. Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de noodzakelijke vereisten van EU-richtlijn betreffende radioapparatuur en telecommunicatie-eindapparatuur 1999/5/EG. Dette udstyr opfylder de Vsentlige krav i EU's direktiv 1999/5/EC om Radio- og teleterminaludstyr. Dette utstyret er i overensstemmelse med hovedkravene i R&TTE-direktivet (1999/5/EC) fra EU. Review Copy Utrustningen uppfyller kraven fr EU-direktivet 1999/5/EC om ansluten teleutrustning och msesidigt erknnande av utrustningens verensstmmelse (R&TTE). Tm laite vastaa EU:n radio- ja teleptelaitedirektiivin (EU R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC) vaatimuksia. This product is intended to be used in all countries of the European Economic Area when operating in IEEE 802.11b and/or IEEE 802.11g mode at 2.4 GHz (see France below). FRANCE Some areas of France have a restricted frequency band for operation in the IEEE 802.11b mode and the IEEE 802.11g mode at 2.4 GHz. The following information describes this restriction. Please check ART's Web site
(http://www.art-telecom.fr) for more up-to-date information. Autorit de rgulation des tlecommunications (ART) has made decisions that will allow users to install WLAN
(wireless LAN) systems to provide high-speed Internet services primarily in high-traffic areas (called hot spots). ART recently released guidelines that establish the conditions for experimenting with the installation of public WLANs, such as for high-speed Internet access in locations that are currently being poorly served by existing networks. Such public WLANs would operate in the 2.4-GHz frequency band. This series of measures answers many of the concerns expressed during Art's public consultation on this topic. User Guide Page 17 Regulatory Information Decisions allowing the installation of wireless terminals in hot spots (train stations, airports, business centers, and the like): In agreement with the Ministry of Defense, ART has made two decisions setting the conditions for using wireless LANs in the 2.4-GHz band. One of these decisions has been submitted to the Minister of Telecommunications for approval. These decisions will allow the installation of WLAN access points to provide public services in high-traffic public places. This will allow service providers and licensed operators to install access points using 2.4 GHz band technologies without authorization, under the following technical conditions:
In 38 dpartements (see Metropolitan Departments on page 19 for listing):
The 24002454 MHz band can be used both indoors and outdoors using systems (access points and devices) with less than 300 milliwatts (mW) of power. The 24542483.5 MHz band can be used indoors using devices with less than 100 mW of power and can be used outdoors using devices with less than 10 mW of power. When the devices are being used outdoors on private property, the power may be increased to 100 mW after approval from the Ministry of Defense.
For the time being, in all other metropolitan dpartements, the conditions remain unchanged. The list of the first 38 dpartements will be progressively added to after 1 January 2003. For the overseas dpartements (DOM), as well as Saint Pierre and Miquelon and Mayotte, the entire 24002483.5 MHz band may be used indoors and outdoors using devices with less than 100 mW of power, except for the Reunion Islands and Guyana, where the 24202483.5 MHz band may be used only outdoors using devices with less than 100 mW of power. ART reminds operators that these frequencies are used with no guarantee of nondisruption, and that the installations must respect all measures applying to radio installations (such as urban planning regulations). These decisions also allow the development of private uses. In particular, private networks (such as indoor corporate networks) can be established using these technologies. Review Copy
Networks using WLAN technology will be granted a free authorization for up to 18 months under article L.33-1 of the Post and Telecommunications Code. These networks may use systems with 100 mW of power (effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP)) on the entire band, indoors and outdoors. Moreover, in the 2.4 GHz band (and providing this power limit is respected), fixed point-to-point links can be established for these networks needs, or frequencies can be requested in other ad hoc bands.
Private and public persons may submit applications to ART, provided that legislation and regulations allow them to do so.
Applications will be processed in a simplified way, in the spirit of the new "Authorization" Directive.
ART will send completed applications to the Ministry of Defense. The Ministry will then check that the projects are not located near any sensitive area and that they are not likely to cause disruptions to military equipment. For each application, ART will then submit its report and the draft authorization to the Minister of Telecommunications. These conditions are tabulated in Table 2 on page 20. Guidelines for Public WLAN Experimentation
Applications can be sent from 12 November 2002 so that the first experiments may be launched as soon as early 2003. Full reviews are to be sent to ART at the end of the temporary authorizations to determine whether the technology guarantees quality and security to users. Page 18 User Guide Regulatory Information Metropolitan Departments Table 1 lists the 38 metropolitan dpartements that permit the use of WLAN systems using less than 100 mW of power (EIRP) indoors across the entire 24002483.5 MHz band and outdoors on the 24002454 MHz band. Table 1: 38 Metropolitan Dpartements 66 67 68 70 71 75 82 84 88 89 90 94 Pyrnes Bas Rhin Haut Rhin Haute Sane Sane et Loire Paris Rarn et Garonne Vaucluse Vosges Yonne Territoire de Belfort Val de Marne 01 02 03 05 08 09 11 12 16 24 25 26 32 Ain Orientales Aisne Allier Hautes Alpes Ardennes Arige Aude Aveyron Charente Dordogne Doubs Drme Gers 36 37 41 42 45 50 55 58 59 60 61 63 64 Indre Indre et Loire Loir et Cher Loire Loiret Manche Meuse Nivre Nord Cise Orne Puy du Dme Pyrnes Atlantique Review Copy Conditions of use for WLANs in hot spots in these 38 dpartements:
The 24002454 MHz band may be used both indoors and outdoors using devices with power (EIRP) of less than 100 milliwatts (mW). The 24542483.5 MHz band may be used indoors using devices with power (EIRP) of less than 100 mW and outdoors using devices with power of less than 10 mW. On private property outdoors, the power may be 100 mW with the approval of the Ministry of Defense. Conditions of use for WLANs in hot spots in other metropolitan dpartements: The conditions of use currently remain unchanged, that is,
The 24002446.5 MHz band may be used indoors using devices with power (EIRP) of less than 10 mW. User Guide Page 19 Regulatory Information
The 2446.52483.5 MHz band may be used indoors using devices with power (EIRP) of less than 100 mW. On private property outdoors, the power may be 100 mW with the approval of the Ministry of Defense. In the 38 Dpartements Table 2: Authorized EIRP Authorized EIRP (mW) Frequency (MHz) Indoors Outdoors: Decisionsa Outdoors: Guidelinesb 2400 2454 248305 100 100 100 10 and 100 on private property with Ministry of Defense approval 100 with Ministry of Defense approval In Other Metropolitan Dpartements In Guadeloupe, Martinique, St. Pierre, and Miquelon and Mayotte Indoors Frequency (MHz) 2400 2454 248305 10 100 Frequency (MHz) 2400 2483.5 Indoors 100 In Reunion Islands and Guyana Frequency (MHz) Indoors 100 Authorized EIRP (mW) Not permitted Authorized EIRP (mW) Outdoors: Decisions*
Outdoors: Decisions and Guidelines 100 on private property with Ministry of Defense approval Review Copy Outdoors: Decisions*
Authorized EIRP (mW) Not permitted 100 100 100 a Concernent les rseaux indpendants et les hot spots b Concernent les xperimentations de rseaux ouverts au public Outdoors: Guidelines**
100 with Ministry of Defense approval Outdoors: Guidelines**
100 with Ministry of Defense approval NOTEThe Integrated 54g enabled notebook transmits less than 100 mW of power, but more than 10 mW. USAFEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) ThIs device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:
The device may not cause harmful interference. The device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTEThe radiated output power of the Integrated 54g enabled notebook is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Integrated 54g enabled notebook should be used in such a Page 20 User Guide Regulatory Information manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, keep a distance of at least 0.5 cm between the user (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the computer. To determine the location of the antenna within the notebook, refer to the operating manual for the Integrated 54g enabled notebook. Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:
Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTEThis Integrated 54g enabled notebook must be used in strict accordance with the computer manufacturer's instructions. Any other installation or use violates FCC Part 15 regulations. Modifications not expressly approved by the computer manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. RADIO APPROVALS Only use this radio device in countries where the device is approved for use. Review Copy User Guide Page 21 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting CANNOT CONNECT TO THE NETWORK If the Integrated 54g enabled notebook appears to be functioning properly but does not connect to the network, the problem may be that there is a mismatch between the Network name (SSID) and Wireless network key (WEP) settings in Wireless Network Properties and the name and WEP key of the network it is trying to connect to. As explained in "Completing the Setup" on page 3, the network name and WEP key are case sensitive. Verify that the spelling and case of these parameters are correct and that the settings are exactly the same on all computers on the network. If the spelling and case of these parameters are correct and the settings are exactly the same on all computers on the network, and the computer is still unable to connect to the network, see Performance and Connectivity Problems. PERFORMANCE AND CONNECTIVITY PROBLEMS Problem or Symptom Possible Solution 1 2 3 4 5 Review Copy Verify that File and Printer Sharing is enabled on all the computers on the network. Click Start, then click Control Panel (Category View). Click Network and Internet Connections. Click Network Connections. Right-click Wireless Network Connections, then click Properties. On the General tab, under This connection uses the following items, verify that the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks check box is selected. If the check box is cleared, select it. If this item is not present, click Install. In the Select Network Component Type box, select Service and click Add. In the Select Network Service box, select File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks and click OK. In Wireless Network Connection Properties, click OK. Microwave ovens and some cordless phones operate at the same radio frequency as the Integrated 54g enabled notebook. When the microwave oven or cordless phone is in use, it interferes with the operation of the wireless network. Therefore, keep the Integrated 54g enabled notebook at least 20 feet away from microwave ovens and any cordless telephone that operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. Some homes and most offices are steel-framed structures. The steel in such buildings may interfere with the network's radio signals, thus causing a slowdown in the data transmission rate. Try moving the Integrated 54g enabled notebook to different locations in the building to see if performance improves. If the network has an access point (AP), check all of the cables and make sure the power LED on the front of the AP is green. Verify that all of the wireless network properties values are correct. Also, make sure the computer is receiving a good signal from the access point. The default settings in Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 require IEEE 802.1x authentication. With IEEE 802.1x authentication enabled, connecting to a network requires a connection with an authentication server. If the network has no authentication server, the connection is disabled every 3 minutes. Therefore, when connecting to a network that has no authentication server, disable IEEE 802.1x authentication by doing the following:
The computers seem to be communicating, but they do not appear in My Computer or in My Network Places. Data transfer is sometimes very slow. Data transfer is always very slow. Computers are not communicating with the network. The network was enabled, but now it is disabled. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Click Start, then click Control Panel (Category View). Click Network and Internet Connections. Click Network Connections. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, then click Properties. Click the Wireless Networks tab. Click the network name under Preferred networks, then click Properties. Click the Authentication tab. Clear the Network access control using IEEE 802.1x check box. Click OK. Page 22 User Guide Problem or Symptom Possible Solution In the ad hoc mode, I am unable to communicate with another user on the same ad hoc network. By default, Windows XP uses a dynamic IP address in ad hoc mode. If you are not able to communicate with other users on the same ad hoc network, assigning a static IP address may correct the problem. Search the Windows Help Center for instructions on assigning a static IP address. Review Copy User Guide Page 23 Glossary Glossary access point ad hoc network available network BER client computer dBm DBPSK DQSPK DSSS GHz host computer IEEE IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11b LAN m Mbit/s MHz ns OFDM Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) file and printer sharing Internet Protocol (IP) address Review Copy A stand-alone wireless hub that allows any computer that has a wireless network adapter to communicate with another computer and to connect to the Internet. A communication configuration in which every computer has the same capabilities and any computer can initiate a communication session. Also known as a peer-to-
peer network or a computer-to-computer network. One of the networks listed in the Available networks list under Wireless Network Connection Properties. Any wireless network that is broadcasting and is within receiving range of the Integrated 54g enabled notebook appears on the list. bit error rate. The ratio of errors to the total number of bits being sent in a data transmission from one location to another. The computer that gets its Internet connection by sharing either the host computer's connection or the access point's connection. Unit of expression of power level in decibels with reference to a power of 1 milliwatt. differential-binary-phase-shift keying. differential-quadrature-phase-shift keying. A compression technique that transmits only the differences between the values of the phase of the sine wave rather than the full absolute value. direct sequence spread spectrum. A type of radio transmission technology used in wireless networking and cellular communications. A mechanism for allocating IP addresses dynamically so that addresses can be reused when hosts no longer need them. A capability that allows a number of people to view, modify, and print the same file(s) from different computers. gigahertz. A unit of frequency equal to 1 000 000 000 cycles per second. The computer that is directly connected to the Internet via a modem or network adapter. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineering The IEEE draft standard for wireless LAN operations in the 2.4 GHz frequency band with a maximum data rate of 54 Mbit/s. This draft standard is expected to be finalized in the summer of 2003. The IEEE standard for wireless LAN operations in the 2.4 GHz frequency band with a maximum data rate of 11 Mbit/s. The address of a computer that is attached to a network. Part of the address designates which network the computer is on, and the other part represents the host identification. local area network meter megabits per second. Transmission speed of 1 000 000 bits per second. megahertz. A unit of frequency equal to 1 000 000 cycles per second. nanosecond. 1 billionth (1/1 000 000 000) of a second. orthogonal frequency division multiplexing. An emerging signal modulation technology for achieving higher data rates in wireless communications. See ad hoc network. Also known as a computer-to-computer network. One of the networks that has been configured. Such networks appear under Preferred networks on the Wireless Networks tab of Wireless Network Connection Properties. A value that controls access to a wireless network. The SSID for your wireless network card must match the SSID for any access point that you want to connect with. If the value does not match, you are not granted access to the network. You can have up to three SSIDs. Each SSID can be up to 32 characters long and is case-
sensitive. A form of data encryption. The WEP key information in the client computer must match the WEP key used by the access point or host computer. The WEP key can be enabled or disabled. The WEP key is case-sensitive. peer-to-peer network preferred network Service Set Identifier (SSID) Wired Equivalent Privacy
(WEP) Page 24 User Guide Review Copy User Guide Page 25 Glossary Review Copy Page 26 User Guide Glossary Review Copy User Guide Page 27 Glossary Review Copy Page 28 User Guide Glossary Review Copy User Guide Page 29 Glossary Review Copy Page 30 User Guide Review Copy User Guide Page 31 Glossary Review Copy Page 32 User Guide Review Copy User Guide Page 33 Glossary Review Copy Page 34 User Guide Review Copy 2003 Hewlett-Packard Company Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Intel is a trademark of Intel corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. The information in this document is provided "as is" without warranty of any kind, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and is subject to change without notice. The warranties for HP products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements accompanying such products. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard Company. User Guide 54g Wireless LAN First Edition February 2003 Document Part Number: 330895-001
1 2 3 4 5 6 | WLAN Guide PP2160 | Users Manual | 526.53 KiB |
User Guide Compaq Integrated Wireless LAN 54g Network Adapter-Quick Start Document Part Number: xxxxxx-xxx Review Copy February 2003-Draft Review Copy TABLE OF CONTENTS Introduction ..........................................................................................................................1 The Integrated 54g Solution........................................................................................................................ 1 Enterprise Users ..................................................................................................................................... 1 Home Users ............................................................................................................................................ 2 Using the Integrated 54g Enabled Notebook............................................................................................. 2 Features and Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 2 Completing the Setup..........................................................................................................3 Modes of Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 3 Infrastructure Mode................................................................................................................................. 3 Characteristics ................................................................................................................................. 3 Advantages...................................................................................................................................... 3 Disadvantages ................................................................................................................................. 3 Requirements .................................................................................................................................. 3 Ad Hoc Mode .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Characteristics ................................................................................................................................. 4 Advantages...................................................................................................................................... 4 Disadvantages ................................................................................................................................. 4 Requirements .................................................................................................................................. 4 Review Copy Configuring a Network Profile..................................................................................................................... 4 Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key ..................................... 5 Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key.................................................... 7 Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key.................... 9 Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key ................................ 11 Specifications.....................................................................................................................14 Physical Characteristics............................................................................................................................ 14 Temperature and Humidity Limitations.................................................................................................... 14 Power Characteristics ............................................................................................................................... 14 Networking Characteristics....................................................................................................................... 14 Radio Characteristics ................................................................................................................................ 15 Regulatory Information .....................................................................................................16 Operational Information ............................................................................................................................ 16 User Guide Page i Wireless Interoperability ........................................................................................................................16 Safety ....................................................................................................................................................16 Regulatory Information ..............................................................................................................................16 CanadaIndustry Canada (IC).............................................................................................................16 EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity.................................................................................................17 France ...................................................................................................................................................17 Guidelines for Public WLAN Experimentation ................................................................................18 Metropolitan Departments ..............................................................................................................19 USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) ............................................................................20 Interference Statement...................................................................................................................21 Radio Approvals ....................................................................................................................................21 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................ 22 Cannot Connect to the Network ................................................................................................................22 Performance and Connectivity Problems ................................................................................................22 Glossary............................................................................................................................. 24 Review Copy Page ii User Guide Introduction THE INTEGRATED 54g SOLUTION The Integrated 54g solution accesses wireless local area networks (WLANs), enables the sharing of a local printer and files with others in the network, enables Internet connection sharing, and enables roaming about the officewire free. This wireless LAN solution is designed for both the home user and small businesses and it is scalable so that users can be added and new network features can be enabled as networking needs grow. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) protocol is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in IEEE Std 802.11, 1999 Edition) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network being connecting to has enabled WEP, WEP must also be enabled in the network profile and the WEP key in the computer must be set to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, it is impossible to connect to the network. The Integrated 54g enabled notebook makes a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated on the following figure. Upon startup, the Integrated 54g enabled notebook detects certain WLANs (wireless networks) that are within range. Before connecting to these and other wireless networks, a user must configure a profile for each network. See "Completing the Setup" on page 3. Networks 1 and 2 are infrastructure types of networks. The two notebook computers connected by radio waves form an ad hoc type of network. Review Copy Figure 1: Types of Networks ENTERPRISE USERS Obtain the following information from the network administrator:
Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks to connect to
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks to connect to
An IP address (if not using a DHCP server)
For Microsoft Windows networking, the customer name and workgroup name For a network account, a user name and password If any of the networks are connected to an authentication server User Guide Page 1 Introduction HOME USERS The AP (access point) that communicates with the Integrated 54g enabled notebook has a preassigned network name (SSID) that the notebook recognizes upon startup. To enable WEP, use any string of numbers for the WEP key. USING THE INTEGRATED 54g ENABLED NOTEBOOK FEATURES AND REQUIREMENTS The Integrated 54g enabled notebook is an IEEE 802.11g based wireless LAN device. A LAN is composed of two or more computers that are connected to each other to share files or common equipment such as a printer or an Internet connection. A wireless LAN provides the same functionality of a wired network, but it eliminates the need to install networking cables and other networking equipment. Not only is a wireless LAN easier to deploy, but it also allows for roaming. For example, when using the Integrated 54g enabled notebook, it is possible to roam from one room in the house to another, or from a conference room to an office without being disconnected from the network. The Integrated 54g solution is an IEEE 802.11 based wireless LAN that includes the following features:
Support for IEEE 802.11g draft specification
Support for IEEE 802.11b standard
Network data rate of up to 54 Mbit/s
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption 2.4-GHz band operation Review Copy The following items are needed for participating in a wireless LAN:
Integrated 54g enabled notebook computer running on a Microsoft Windows XP operating system
Software drivers, software reference guide, and Help file The Integrated 54g enabled notebook works with any IEEE 802.11b Wi-Fi CERTIFIED or IEEE 802.11g access point or wireless client network adapter. Page 2 User Guide Characteristics Advantages Completing the Setup NOTEBefore starting, obtain the required network information from the network administrator or the wireless access point installer (see The Integrated 54g Solution on page 1). MODES OF OPERATION A wireless LAN can be configured for two different modes of operation: infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode
(an ad hoc network is also known as a peer-to-peer network or a computer-to-computer network). Whereas each mode has its advantages, one mode may be more appropriate than the other, depending on the location and type of network connection. INFRASTRUCTURE MODE The key difference between the infrastructure type of network and an ad hoc network is that the infrastructure network includes a base station (host) computer that has a built-in wireless network adapter and is connected to a wireless access point (AP). This functionality allows computers on the infrastructure wireless LAN to access the resources and tools of the wired LAN, including Internet access, e-mail, file sharing, and printer sharing. Review Copy Networked computers communicate with each other through a dedicated AP. All data transmitted between the computers on this wireless LAN passes through the AP.
Extended range. The access point extends the range of the wireless LAN. Each computer can communicate with other computers equipped by wireless networks that are within the range of the access point.
Roaming. As the user moves around the home or office, the Integrated 54g enabled notebook determines the best access point to use to ensure continuous communication with the network.
Network connectivity. An access point can provide wireless LAN access to an existing wired network by bridging the two networks together. This gives users of the wireless LAN access to all the functions of a wired networkfrom file server access to access to e-mail and the Internet. Disadvantages Because the infrastructure mode offers more features, it requires additional components and setup time to deploy. Requirements
A base station computer having a wired connection to the Internet
A wireless network adapter
A connection to an AP (access point) User Guide Page 3 Completing the Setup AD HOC MODE An ad hoc network is the easiest to deploy and is ideal for home use or in small offices. This mode allows the sharing of files with other employees, printing to a shared office printer, and access to the Internet through a shared modem. With ad hoc networking, however, the computer is only able to communicate with other wireless networks that are within a certain range and are in the same wireless workgroup. Characteristics Networked computers send data directly to each other without the need of an access point. Advantages
Simple setup
Cost efficiency Disadvantages Requirements
Communication is limited to those who are located within a certain range.
IEEE 802.1x security is not available. There are no other equipment requirements for operating in the ad hoc mode besides 2 WLAN enabled notebooks or desktop PCs. Review Copy CONFIGURING A NETWORK PROFILE To connect to a wireless network, a network profile for that network must be configured on the Integrated 54g enabled notebook. If the Integrated 54g enabled notebook computer came with the Integrated 54g network adapter already installed and set up at the factory, follow the network profile configuration instructions provided below. NOTEFor more information on how to configure a network profile and IEEE 802.1x authentication, click Learn about setting up wireless network configuration on the Wireless Networks tab of Wireless Network Connection Properties. You can configure a network profile for networks that are listed under Available networks as well as those that are not listed. When you have completed configuring a network profile, the network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. The computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list. Follow the applicable instruction set below, based on whether or not the network is listed, whether or not the network requires a WEP key, and whether or not the network is connected to an authentication server (check with the network administrator to see if a WEP key is required and if the network is connected to an authentication server). NOTEBoth the network name and the network key are case-sensitive.
Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key on page 5 Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key on page 7 Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key on page 9 Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key on page 11 Page 4 User Guide Completing the Setup CONFIGURING A PROFILE FOR A LISTED NETWORK THAT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WEP KEY 1 Click Start, then click Control Panel (Category View). 2 3 4 Click Network and Internet Connections. Click Network Connections. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. Review Copy Click the Wireless Networks tab. 5 6 Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. User Guide Page 5 Completing the Setup 7 The default settings in Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 require IEEE 802.1x authentication. With IEEE 802.1x authentication enabled, connecting to a network requires a connection with an authentication server. If the network has no authentication server, the connection is disabled every 3 minutes. Therefore, when connecting to a network that has no authentication server, disable IEEE 802.1x authentication by doing the following (if the network does have an authentication server, ignore this step):
Click the Authentication tab.
Clear the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1x check box. 8 Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. Review Copy 9 Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. Page 6 User Guide Completing the Setup CONFIGURING A PROFILE FOR A LISTED NETWORK THAT REQUIRES A WEP KEY 1 Click Start, then click Control Panel (Category View). 2 Click Network and Internet Connections. 3 4 Click Network Connections. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. Review Copy Click the Wireless Networks tab. 5 6 Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. User Guide Page 7 Completing the Setup Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) check box. 7 8 Clear the The key is provided for me automatically check box. 9 Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 10 The default settings in Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 require IEEE 802.1x authentication. With IEEE 802.1x authentication enabled, connecting to a network requires a connection with an authentication server. If the network has no authentication server, the connection is disabled every 3 minutes. Therefore, when connecting to a network that has no authentication server, disable IEEE 802.1x authentication by doing the following (if the network does have an authentication server, ignore this step):
Click the Authentication tab.
Clear the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1x check box. 11 Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. Review Copy 12 Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. Page 8 User Guide Completing the Setup CONFIGURING A PROFILE FOR A NETWORK THAT IS NOT LISTED AND DOES NOT REQUIRE A WEP KEY 1 Click Start, then click Control Panel (Category View). 2 3 4 Click Network and Internet Connections. Click Network Connections. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. Review Copy Click the Wireless Networks tab. 5 6 Click Add. User Guide Page 9 Completing the Setup Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 7 8 The default settings in Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 require IEEE 802.1x authentication. With IEEE 802.1x authentication enabled, connecting to a network requires a connection with an authentication server. If the network has no authentication server, the connection is disabled every 3 minutes. Therefore, when connecting to a network that has no authentication server, disable IEEE 802.1x authentication by doing the following (if the network does have an authentication server, ignore this step):
Click the Authentication tab.
Clear the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1x check box. 9 Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. Review Copy Page 10 User Guide Completing the Setup 10 Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. CONFIGURING A PROFILE FOR A NETWORK THAT IS NOT LISTED AND REQUIRES A WEP KEY 1 Click Start, then click Control Panel (Category View). 2 3 Click Network and Internet Connections. Click Network Connections. 4 Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. Review Copy Click the Wireless Networks tab. Click Add. 5 6 User Guide Page 11 Completing the Setup Review Copy 7 Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) check box. 8 9 Clear the The key is provided for me automatically check box. 10 Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 11 The default settings in Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 require IEEE 802.1x authentication. With IEEE 802.1x authentication enabled, connecting to a network requires a connection with an authentication server. If the network has no authentication server, the connection is disabled every 3 minutes. Therefore, when connecting to a network that has no authentication server, disable IEEE 802.1x authentication by doing the following (if the network does have an authentication server, ignore this step):
Click the Authentication tab.
Clear the Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1x check box. 12 Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. Page 12 User Guide 13 Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for that network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. Review Copy User Guide Page 13 Specifications Specifications PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS Characteristic Description Form Factor Dimensions (length, width) Mini PCI specification, May 2002. Type IIIA form factor 59.6 mm 50.95 mm TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY LIMITATIONS Condition Description POWER CHARACTERISTICS Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Characteristic Doze Mode Receive Mode Transmit Mode Power Supply Values 0 to 70C 95% maximum (no condensation allowed) 40 to 90C 95% maximum (no condensation allowed) Review Copy 40 mA 400 mA 600 mA 3.3 V IEEE 802.11g Operation 40 mA 220 mA 330 mA 3.3 V NETWORKING CHARACTERISTICS IEEE 802.11b Operation Characteristic Description Compatibility Network Operating System Host Operating System Medium Access Protocol Data Rate (Mbit/s)a IEEE Std 802.11b and IEEE Draft Std 802.11g for wireless LAN Microsoft Windows Networking Microsoft Windows XP CSMA/CA (collision avoidance) with acknowledgment (ACK)
IEEE Draft Std 802.11g: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 IEEE Std 802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 a The Integrated 54g solution uses an automated rate select mechanism Page 14 User Guide Specifications RADIO CHARACTERISTICS Characteristica Description Frequency Band Modulation Technique Spreading Bit Error Rate (BER) Nominal Output Power 2.4 GHz (IEEE 802.11b, IEEE Draft Std 802.11g) Direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS)
CCK for high and medium transmit rate
DQPSK for standard transmit rate
DBPSK for low transmit rate Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM)
52 subcarriers with BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM or 64-QAM
Forward error correction convolutional coding rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4 11-chip Barker sequence Better than 105 ppm
IEEE Std 802.11b: 14 dBm IEEE Draft Std 802.11g: 15 dBm a See "Regulatory Information" on page 16 for country-specific performance characteristics and use restrictions. Review Copy User Guide Page 15 Regulatory Information Regulatory Information OPERATIONAL INFORMATION WIRELESS INTEROPERABILITY The Integrated 54g enabled notebook is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) and orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:
IEEE Std 802.11b-1999. Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN IEEE Std 802.11g-2002. Draft standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN SAFETY The Integrated 54g enabled notebook, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this devices, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Integrated 54g enabled notebook operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of a Integrated 54g enabled notebook may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:
Using the Integrated 54g enabled notebook onboard airplanes, or
Using the Integrated 54g enabled notebook in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. Review Copy If uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment
(in an airplane, for example), ask for authorization to use the Integrated 54g enabled notebook before turning it on. REGULATORY INFORMATION The Integrated 54g enabled notebook must be used in strict accordance with this manual. For country-specific approvals, see Radio Approvals on page 21. The computer manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this Integrated 54g enabled notebook kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by the computer manufacturer. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution, or attachment is the responsibility of the user. The computer manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user's failing to comply with these guidelines. CANADAINDUSTRY CANADA (IC) This device complies with RSS210 of Industry Canada. Page 16 User Guide EUROPEEU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Regulatory Information This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. Cet quipement est conforme aux principales caractristiques dfinies dans la Directive europenne RTTE 1999/5/CE. Die Gerte erfllen die grundlegenden Anforderungen der RTTE-Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. Questa apparecchiatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali della Direttiva Europea R&TTE 1999/5/CE. Este equipo cumple los requisitos principales de la Directiva 1999/5/CE de la UE, "Equipos de Terminales de Radio y Telecomunicaciones". Este equipamento cumpre os requisitos essenciais da Directiva 1999/5/CE do Parlamento Europeu e do Conselho (Directiva RTT). O exoplismos autos plhroi tis basikes apaits ths koinotikhs odhgias EU R&TTE 1999/5/E. Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de noodzakelijke vereisten van EU-richtlijn betreffende radioapparatuur en telecommunicatie-eindapparatuur 1999/5/EG. Dette udstyr opfylder de Vsentlige krav i EU's direktiv 1999/5/EC om Radio- og teleterminaludstyr. Dette utstyret er i overensstemmelse med hovedkravene i R&TTE-direktivet (1999/5/EC) fra EU. Review Copy Utrustningen uppfyller kraven fr EU-direktivet 1999/5/EC om ansluten teleutrustning och msesidigt erknnande av utrustningens verensstmmelse (R&TTE). Tm laite vastaa EU:n radio- ja teleptelaitedirektiivin (EU R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC) vaatimuksia. This product is intended to be used in all countries of the European Economic Area when operating in IEEE 802.11b and/or IEEE 802.11g mode at 2.4 GHz (see France below). FRANCE Some areas of France have a restricted frequency band for operation in the IEEE 802.11b mode and the IEEE 802.11g mode at 2.4 GHz. The following information describes this restriction. Please check ART's Web site
(http://www.art-telecom.fr) for more up-to-date information. Autorit de rgulation des tlecommunications (ART) has made decisions that will allow users to install WLAN
(wireless LAN) systems to provide high-speed Internet services primarily in high-traffic areas (called hot spots). ART recently released guidelines that establish the conditions for experimenting with the installation of public WLANs, such as for high-speed Internet access in locations that are currently being poorly served by existing networks. Such public WLANs would operate in the 2.4-GHz frequency band. This series of measures answers many of the concerns expressed during Art's public consultation on this topic. User Guide Page 17 Regulatory Information Decisions allowing the installation of wireless terminals in hot spots (train stations, airports, business centers, and the like): In agreement with the Ministry of Defense, ART has made two decisions setting the conditions for using wireless LANs in the 2.4-GHz band. One of these decisions has been submitted to the Minister of Telecommunications for approval. These decisions will allow the installation of WLAN access points to provide public services in high-traffic public places. This will allow service providers and licensed operators to install access points using 2.4 GHz band technologies without authorization, under the following technical conditions:
In 38 dpartements (see Metropolitan Departments on page 19 for listing):
The 24002454 MHz band can be used both indoors and outdoors using systems (access points and devices) with less than 300 milliwatts (mW) of power. The 24542483.5 MHz band can be used indoors using devices with less than 100 mW of power and can be used outdoors using devices with less than 10 mW of power. When the devices are being used outdoors on private property, the power may be increased to 100 mW after approval from the Ministry of Defense.
For the time being, in all other metropolitan dpartements, the conditions remain unchanged. The list of the first 38 dpartements will be progressively added to after 1 January 2003. For the overseas dpartements (DOM), as well as Saint Pierre and Miquelon and Mayotte, the entire 24002483.5 MHz band may be used indoors and outdoors using devices with less than 100 mW of power, except for the Reunion Islands and Guyana, where the 24202483.5 MHz band may be used only outdoors using devices with less than 100 mW of power. ART reminds operators that these frequencies are used with no guarantee of nondisruption, and that the installations must respect all measures applying to radio installations (such as urban planning regulations). These decisions also allow the development of private uses. In particular, private networks (such as indoor corporate networks) can be established using these technologies. Review Copy
Networks using WLAN technology will be granted a free authorization for up to 18 months under article L.33-1 of the Post and Telecommunications Code. These networks may use systems with 100 mW of power (effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP)) on the entire band, indoors and outdoors. Moreover, in the 2.4 GHz band (and providing this power limit is respected), fixed point-to-point links can be established for these networks needs, or frequencies can be requested in other ad hoc bands.
Private and public persons may submit applications to ART, provided that legislation and regulations allow them to do so.
Applications will be processed in a simplified way, in the spirit of the new "Authorization" Directive.
ART will send completed applications to the Ministry of Defense. The Ministry will then check that the projects are not located near any sensitive area and that they are not likely to cause disruptions to military equipment. For each application, ART will then submit its report and the draft authorization to the Minister of Telecommunications. These conditions are tabulated in Table 2 on page 20. Guidelines for Public WLAN Experimentation
Applications can be sent from 12 November 2002 so that the first experiments may be launched as soon as early 2003. Full reviews are to be sent to ART at the end of the temporary authorizations to determine whether the technology guarantees quality and security to users. Page 18 User Guide Regulatory Information Metropolitan Departments Table 1 lists the 38 metropolitan dpartements that permit the use of WLAN systems using less than 100 mW of power (EIRP) indoors across the entire 24002483.5 MHz band and outdoors on the 24002454 MHz band. Table 1: 38 Metropolitan Dpartements 66 67 68 70 71 75 82 84 88 89 90 94 Pyrnes Bas Rhin Haut Rhin Haute Sane Sane et Loire Paris Rarn et Garonne Vaucluse Vosges Yonne Territoire de Belfort Val de Marne 01 02 03 05 08 09 11 12 16 24 25 26 32 Ain Orientales Aisne Allier Hautes Alpes Ardennes Arige Aude Aveyron Charente Dordogne Doubs Drme Gers 36 37 41 42 45 50 55 58 59 60 61 63 64 Indre Indre et Loire Loir et Cher Loire Loiret Manche Meuse Nivre Nord Cise Orne Puy du Dme Pyrnes Atlantique Review Copy Conditions of use for WLANs in hot spots in these 38 dpartements:
The 24002454 MHz band may be used both indoors and outdoors using devices with power (EIRP) of less than 100 milliwatts (mW). The 24542483.5 MHz band may be used indoors using devices with power (EIRP) of less than 100 mW and outdoors using devices with power of less than 10 mW. On private property outdoors, the power may be 100 mW with the approval of the Ministry of Defense. Conditions of use for WLANs in hot spots in other metropolitan dpartements: The conditions of use currently remain unchanged, that is,
The 24002446.5 MHz band may be used indoors using devices with power (EIRP) of less than 10 mW. User Guide Page 19 Regulatory Information
The 2446.52483.5 MHz band may be used indoors using devices with power (EIRP) of less than 100 mW. On private property outdoors, the power may be 100 mW with the approval of the Ministry of Defense. In the 38 Dpartements Table 2: Authorized EIRP Authorized EIRP (mW) Frequency (MHz) Indoors Outdoors: Decisionsa Outdoors: Guidelinesb 2400 2454 248305 100 100 100 10 and 100 on private property with Ministry of Defense approval 100 with Ministry of Defense approval In Other Metropolitan Dpartements In Guadeloupe, Martinique, St. Pierre, and Miquelon and Mayotte Indoors Frequency (MHz) 2400 2454 248305 10 100 Frequency (MHz) 2400 2483.5 Indoors 100 In Reunion Islands and Guyana Frequency (MHz) Indoors 100 Authorized EIRP (mW) Not permitted Authorized EIRP (mW) Outdoors: Decisions*
Outdoors: Decisions and Guidelines 100 on private property with Ministry of Defense approval Review Copy Outdoors: Decisions*
Authorized EIRP (mW) Not permitted 100 100 100 a Concernent les rseaux indpendants et les hot spots b Concernent les xperimentations de rseaux ouverts au public Outdoors: Guidelines**
100 with Ministry of Defense approval Outdoors: Guidelines**
100 with Ministry of Defense approval NOTEThe Integrated 54g enabled notebook transmits less than 100 mW of power, but more than 10 mW. USAFEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) ThIs device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:
The device may not cause harmful interference. The device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTEThe radiated output power of the Integrated 54g enabled notebook is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Integrated 54g enabled notebook should be used in such a Page 20 User Guide Regulatory Information manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, keep a distance of at least 20 cm between the user (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the computer. To determine the location of the antenna within the notebook, refer to the operating manual for the Integrated 54g enable notebook. Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:
Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTEThis Integrated 54g enabled notebook must be used in strict accordance with the computer manufacturer's instructions. Any other installation or use violates FCC Part 15 regulations. Modifications not expressly approved by the computer manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. RADIO APPROVALS Only use this radio device in countries where the device is approved for use. Review Copy User Guide Page 21 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting CANNOT CONNECT TO THE NETWORK If the Integrated 54g enabled notebook appears to be functioning properly but does not connect to the network, the problem may be that there is a mismatch between the Network name (SSID) and Wireless network key (WEP) settings in Wireless Network Properties and the name and WEP key of the network it is trying to connect to. As explained in "Completing the Setup" on page 3, the network name and WEP key are case sensitive. Verify that the spelling and case of these parameters are correct and that the settings are exactly the same on all computers on the network. If the spelling and case of these parameters are correct and the settings are exactly the same on all computers on the network, and the computer is still unable to connect to the network, see Performance and Connectivity Problems. PERFORMANCE AND CONNECTIVITY PROBLEMS Problem or Symptom Possible Solution 1 2 3 4 5 Review Copy Verify that File and Printer Sharing is enabled on all the computers on the network. Click Start, then click Control Panel (Category View). Click Network and Internet Connections. Click Network Connections. Right-click Wireless Network Connections, then click Properties. On the General tab, under This connection uses the following items, verify that the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks check box is selected. If the check box is cleared, select it. If this item is not present, click Install. In the Select Network Component Type box, select Service and click Add. In the Select Network Service box, select File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks and click OK. In Wireless Network Connection Properties, click OK. Microwave ovens and some cordless phones operate at the same radio frequency as the Integrated 54g enabled notebook. When the microwave oven or cordless phone is in use, it interferes with the operation of the wireless network. Therefore, keep the Integrated 54g enabled notebook at least 20 feet away from microwave ovens and any cordless telephone that operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. Some homes and most offices are steel-framed structures. The steel in such buildings may interfere with the network's radio signals, thus causing a slowdown in the data transmission rate. Try moving the Integrated 54g enabled notebook to different locations in the building to see if performance improves. If the network has an access point (AP), check all of the cables and make sure the power LED on the front of the AP is green. Verify that all of the wireless network properties values are correct. Also, make sure the computer is receiving a good signal from the access point. The default settings in Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 require IEEE 802.1x authentication. With IEEE 802.1x authentication enabled, connecting to a network requires a connection with an authentication server. If the network has no authentication server, the connection is disabled every 3 minutes. Therefore, when connecting to a network that has no authentication server, disable IEEE 802.1x authentication by doing the following:
The computers seem to be communicating, but they do not appear in My Computer or in My Network Places. Data transfer is sometimes very slow. Data transfer is always very slow. Computers are not communicating with the network. The network was enabled, but now it is disabled. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Click Start, then click Control Panel (Category View). Click Network and Internet Connections. Click Network Connections. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, then click Properties. Click the Wireless Networks tab. Click the network name under Preferred networks, then click Properties. Click the Authentication tab. Clear the Network access control using IEEE 802.1x check box. Click OK. Page 22 User Guide Problem or Symptom Possible Solution In the ad hoc mode, I am unable to communicate with another user on the same ad hoc network. By default, Windows XP uses a dynamic IP address in ad hoc mode. If you are not able to communicate with other users on the same ad hoc network, assigning a static IP address may correct the problem. Search the Windows Help Center for instructions on assigning a static IP address. Review Copy User Guide Page 23 Glossary Glossary access point ad hoc network available network BER client computer dBm DBPSK DQSPK DSSS GHz host computer IEEE IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11b LAN m Mbit/s MHz ns OFDM Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) file and printer sharing Internet Protocol (IP) address Review Copy A stand-alone wireless hub that allows any computer that has a wireless network adapter to communicate with another computer and to connect to the Internet. A communication configuration in which every computer has the same capabilities and any computer can initiate a communication session. Also known as a peer-to-
peer network or a computer-to-computer network. One of the networks listed in the Available networks list under Wireless Network Connection Properties. Any wireless network that is broadcasting and is within receiving range of the Integrated 54g enabled notebook appears on the list. bit error rate. The ratio of errors to the total number of bits being sent in a data transmission from one location to another. The computer that gets its Internet connection by sharing either the host computer's connection or the access point's connection. Unit of expression of power level in decibels with reference to a power of 1 milliwatt. differential-binary-phase-shift keying. differential-quadrature-phase-shift keying. A compression technique that transmits only the differences between the values of the phase of the sine wave rather than the full absolute value. direct sequence spread spectrum. A type of radio transmission technology used in wireless networking and cellular communications. A mechanism for allocating IP addresses dynamically so that addresses can be reused when hosts no longer need them. A capability that allows a number of people to view, modify, and print the same file(s) from different computers. gigahertz. A unit of frequency equal to 1 000 000 000 cycles per second. The computer that is directly connected to the Internet via a modem or network adapter. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineering The IEEE draft standard for wireless LAN operations in the 2.4 GHz frequency band with a maximum data rate of 54 Mbit/s. This draft standard is expected to be finalized in the summer of 2003. The IEEE standard for wireless LAN operations in the 2.4 GHz frequency band with a maximum data rate of 11 Mbit/s. The address of a computer that is attached to a network. Part of the address designates which network the computer is on, and the other part represents the host identification. local area network meter megabits per second. Transmission speed of 1 000 000 bits per second. megahertz. A unit of frequency equal to 1 000 000 cycles per second. nanosecond. 1 billionth (1/1 000 000 000) of a second. orthogonal frequency division multiplexing. An emerging signal modulation technology for achieving higher data rates in wireless communications. See ad hoc network. Also known as a computer-to-computer network. One of the networks that has been configured. Such networks appear under Preferred networks on the Wireless Networks tab of Wireless Network Connection Properties. A value that controls access to a wireless network. The SSID for your wireless network card must match the SSID for any access point that you want to connect with. If the value does not match, you are not granted access to the network. You can have up to three SSIDs. Each SSID can be up to 32 characters long and is case-
sensitive. A form of data encryption. The WEP key information in the client computer must match the WEP key used by the access point or host computer. The WEP key can be enabled or disabled. The WEP key is case-sensitive. peer-to-peer network preferred network Service Set Identifier (SSID) Wired Equivalent Privacy
(WEP) Page 24 User Guide Review Copy User Guide Page 25 Glossary Review Copy Page 26 User Guide Glossary Review Copy User Guide Page 27 Glossary Review Copy Page 28 User Guide Glossary Review Copy User Guide Page 29 Glossary Review Copy Page 30 User Guide Review Copy User Guide Page 31 Glossary Review Copy Page 32 User Guide Review Copy User Guide Page 33 Glossary Review Copy Page 34 User Guide Review Copy 2003 Hewlett-Packard Company Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Intel is a trademark of Intel corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. The information in this document is provided "as is" without warranty of any kind, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and is subject to change without notice. The warranties for HP products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements accompanying such products. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard Company. User Guide 54g Wireless LAN First Edition February 2003 Document Part Number: 330895-001
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2004-06-11 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2003-10-16 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
3 | 2003-09-18 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
4 | 2003-08-12 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
5 | 2003-07-10 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
6 | 2003-02-27 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Effective |
2004-06-11
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
2003-10-16
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
2003-09-18
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
2003-08-12
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
2003-07-10
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
2003-02-27
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Broadcom Corporation
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0007091952
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Physical Address |
270 Innovation Drive
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
San Jose, California 95134
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | TCB Application Email Address |
m******@ccsemc.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
G******@ict.cetecom.de
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
g******@ict.cetecom.de
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Grantee Code |
QDS
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Equipment Product Code |
BRCM1005-H
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
A****** L******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Title |
Manager, Compliance Engineering
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
40892********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
408-5********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
a******@broadcom.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Firm Name |
CETECOM Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
L**** S******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Physical Address |
411 Dixon Landing Road
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Milpitas, California 95035
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
+1 40********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
+1 40********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
L******@cetecomusa.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Firm Name |
CETECOM Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
L******** S****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Physical Address |
411 Dixon Landing Road
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Milipitas, California 95035
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
+1 40********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
+1 40********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
L******@cetecomusa.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Yes | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | 802.11g Mini PCI Card built in Laptops | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 802.11g MINI PCI Card build in Laptops | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 802.11g MINI PCI Card build in Laptops | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Grant Comments | In this Class II Permissive Change filing, WLAN module is tested with Laptop model HSTNN-Q09C with alternate antenna as documented in this filing. Power Output listed is peak conducted. The antenna(s) and transmitter must be installed by the manufacturer as shown in the filing. The antenna(s) used for this filing must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR value for all filings approved under this FCC ID is: 0.607 W/kg. | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | In this Class II Permissive Change filing, WLAN module is tested with Laptop model PP2200 with two alternate antennas as documented in this filing. Power Output listed is peak conducted. The antenna(s) and transmitter must be installed by the manufacturer as shown in the filing. The antenna(s) used for this filing must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR value for all filings approved under this FCC ID is: 0.607 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | This Class II Permissive Change adds Laptop model PP2180 with 0.48dBi antenna as documented in this filing. Power Output listed is peak conducted. The antenna(s) and transmitter in this device must be installed by the manufacturer as shown in the filing. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR value for all filings ( PP2080, CRVSA 02T175, CRVSA 02T190 notebook PC ) approved under this FCC ID is: 0.607 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | This Class II Permissive Change adds Laptop model PP2080 and a variant of the Mini PCI Card to the previous filing. Power Output listed is peak conducted. The antenna(s) and transmitter in this device must be installed by the manufacturer as shown in the filing. The antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna(s) or transmitter. The MPE / SAR data in this filing are applicable to demonstrate compliance for the final products only as shown in this filing. End-users and installers must be provided transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Maximum SAR value measured: Body 0.325 W/kg | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Class II permissive change filing to include the transmitter module installed in the specific laptop computer with alternate antenna as documented in the filing. Power Output listed is Conducted. The antenna(s) and transmitter in this device must be installed by the manufacturer as shown in the filing. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Power Output listed is Conducted. The antenna(s) and transmitter in this device must be installed by the manufacturer as shown in the filing. The antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna(s) or transmitter. The MPE / SAR data in this filing are applicable to demonstrate compliance for the final products only as shown in this filing. End-users and installers must be provided transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Maximum SAR value measured is: Body 0.607 W/kg | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Firm Name |
Compliance Certification Services Inc
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Cetecom Inc.
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
S******** C****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
L****** S********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
408-4******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
408-5********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
408-4********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
510-2********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
s******@ccsemc.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
l******@cetecomusa.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | CE | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3590000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | CE | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3590000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | CE | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3590000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15C | CE | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3590000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 15C | CE | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3590000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 1 | 15C | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3590000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC